Media Industry Sector Analysis

profileDonald Trump
john.zip

remediasectoranalysis/Assignment 2 Overview and links to resources.docx

Assignment Information: Media Industry Sector Analysis

The media industry sector analysis provides you with an opportunity to research and critically examine a particular sector of the media industry in Australia. Choose from  one of the following sectors:

· Newspapers

· Television

· Public broadcasting

· Radio

· Online media

· Publishing (book or magazine)

In 2,000 words you should address the following questions:

1. What are consumption trends in the sector?

2. What do these trends suggest about the viability of the sector you have chosen?

3. What are its prospects compared to other sectors. In other words, is your chosen sector doing well and likely to continue to do well in the future, or is it changing, struggling or likely to do poorly in the future? Why?

4. What are the major challenges/opportunities faced by the sector?

5. How are different organisations within the sector dealing with the present situation, perhaps in different ways and with varying degrees of success?

Your analysis should engage with key concepts in the subject themes, case studies, theories, concepts and debates where relevant. The format can be in any way you choose to present it, however NO heading is needed. You are also free to make international comparisons as warranted (though be careful: you don’t have much space!) References do not count toward word count and need to be in Harvard Format.

Do remember that this is a scholarly exercise, not an exercise in opinion writing! So it’s important to back up your analysis with evidence, which might reference such things as audience demographics, government policies, information on ownership, information on particular companies and their finances, advertising and other revenue as well as and other factors which will impact upon the media industries in Australia.

You may find the suggested readings USEFUL

You’ll find the resources listed on the next this guide a good place to start looking for information, especially the websites of industry peak bodies. If you’re looking at particular companies as part of your analysis, annual reports for many can be found online. Any available IBIS research on industry sectors and particular companies can be accessed via the library database. Lexis Nexis is also a good source of reporting about sectors and companies. Google Scholar will also help you track down relevant scholarship.

RESOURCE LIST AND LINKS PRESS CTRL + TO FOLLOW THEM

If you're wondering which journals in the field of media and communication are the best, most authoritative, and appropriate to this subject, here's a quick list that also includes some of the better cultural studies journals, which also often carry good articles on the media:

Australian Journal of Communication

Australian Journalism Review

Australian Studies in Journalism

Big Data and Society

Communication, Politics and Culture 

Continuum

Cultural Studies

Cultural Studies Review

European Journal of Cultural Studies

International Journal of Communication

International Journal of Cultural Studies

Media, Culture and Society

Media and Arts Law Review

Media International Australia

New Media and Society

Public Culture

Social Text

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

ACMA

 The Australian Communications and Media Authority website is an invaluable resource – see especially the ‘publications and research’ section for papers on TV, radio and the Internet.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

Ad News

Ad News provides advertising industry news from Australia and internationally.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

AFA

The Advertising Federation of Australia website is useful for codes and regulations, industry information and effectiveness case studies.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

AFC

The Australian Film Commission's 'Get the Picture' is a great source of industry information and statistics on Australian television (free-to-air and subscription), film, and other digital and online media.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

ARIA

The Australian Recording Industry Association website.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

The Australian 'Media' Section

The Australian has a ‘Media’ section every Thursday. It contains excellent up-to-date information on the Australian media, and is especially good to keep track of changes in ownership or regulation. Some of the articles are available online.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

B&T

B & T is a marketing, advertising and media magazine and their website is a great resource - older articles can be accessed through Factiva on  SuperSearch

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

CRA

Commercial Radio Australia is the national industry body representing about 98% of Australia's commercial broadcasters. This site is useful for ownership, regulations and other industry information.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

Fairfax Ad Centre

Information about Fairfax newspapers and other publications for potential advertisers - includes reader profiles, circulation and demographics, as well as advertising rates for print and online.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

FreeTV Australia

Free TV Australia represents Australia's commercial free-to-air television stations, and their website is a good place for accessing research, codes of practice and industry changes and developments.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

Media Watch

Also, it is advised that you watch  Media Watch (weekly on ABC television). Currently, it is on each Monday night at 9.20pm on ABC TV (Channel Two) or see the repeat on Weds at 12:20 am;  Media Watch also screens on ABC2 (digital) Tuesdays at 8:45am. Transcripts and some video is available online.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

MPA

Magazine Puplishers of Australia is the body that represent Australia's consumer magazine publishers - this is a valuable source for industry statistics and information.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

NielsenMedia

Nielsen Media Research Australia conduct radio ratings and other audience and opinion research; this site is also good for advertising and other industry data.

· https://app.lms.unimelb.edu.au/images/ci/sets/set01/link_on.gif

OzTAM

OzTAM is the official source of television audience measurement (TAM) in Australia. The media industry uses OzTAM data to assist in program development, advertising planning and to show how television programs and networks perform. This site is a good source for understanding how 'ratings' work and accessing weekly television ratings data.

image1.gif

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Assignment 2 Overview and links to resources.docx

remediasectoranalysis/Branding Real Social Change in Dove s Campaign for Real Beauty.pdf

Full Terms & Conditions of access and use can be found at http://www.tandfonline.com/action/journalInformation?journalCode=rfms20

Download by: [The University Of Melbourne Libraries] Date: 09 April 2017, At: 23:29

Feminist Media Studies

ISSN: 1468-0777 (Print) 1471-5902 (Online) Journal homepage: http://www.tandfonline.com/loi/rfms20

Branding “Real” Social Change in Dove's Campaign for Real Beauty

Dara Persis Murray

To cite this article: Dara Persis Murray (2013) Branding “Real” Social Change in Dove's Campaign for Real Beauty, Feminist Media Studies, 13:1, 83-101, DOI: 10.1080/14680777.2011.647963

To link to this article: http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/14680777.2011.647963

Published online: 17 Jan 2012.

Submit your article to this journal

Article views: 5782

View related articles

Citing articles: 9 View citing articles

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE IN

DOVE’S CAMPAIGN FOR REAL BEAUTY

Dara Persis Murray

This article examines the cause branding strategy of The Dove Campaign for Real Beauty (CFRB) as

a case study in the production and consumption of contemporary popular meanings of feminism,

social change, female citizenship, and female beauty in global consumer culture. A feminist

semiotic analysis of the print, television, and new media texts that launched CFRB and its brand

extensions reveals a juxtaposition in its “real beauty” messaging: signs reference a key opposition in

feminist politics (liberation and oppression) while dictating a beauty ideology that encompasses

appearance and behavior. Further, the texts situate the brand as the site for female activism about

the dominant ideology of beauty; this strategy positions the corporation to usurp the feminist role

of engendering social change for women and displaces the influential mentoring role away from

women who share girls’ everyday lives onto an agent of institutional power. Finally, the author

argues that this postfeminist-supported campaign encourages the global spread of and

individuals’ enlistment in postfeminist citizenship via becoming a “real beauty” who self-brands her

neoliberal identity ideologically and materially in the name of empowerment. This “social change”

denies agency regarding beauty, sanctions postfeminist citizenship, and holds danger for future

meanings and practices of feminism.

KEYWORDS cause branding; beauty ideal; commodity feminism; postfeminism; interactivity;

self-branding

In June 2010, the Dove Movement for Self-Esteem launched at the G(irls) 20 Summit.

Modeled after the G20 Summit, this convention brought together young women from the

same countries1 represented at the G20 Summit to discuss education, health, and

economic initiatives that could stimulate girls’ activism and advancement in their

communities. The ideological intersection of the Movement (a brand extension of Dove’s

Campaign for Real Beauty, or CFRB) and the G(irls) 20 Summit reflects the complex and

often problematic meanings of feminism that circulate in popular culture: the blending of

active female citizenship with empowerment via consumption in the marketplace.

This paper explores CFRB’s branding strategy, wherein its “real beauty” messaging

merges co-opted feminist discourse and “a postfeminist sensibility” (Gill 2007, p. 254).

A feminist semiotic analysis suggests that, under a guise of corporate altruism that

democratizes female beauty, CFRB endorses global postfeminist citizenship. The findings

q 2012 Taylor & Francis

Feminist Media Studies, 2013 Vol. 13, No. 1, 83–101, http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/14680777.2011.647963

suggest that CFRB may reflect a social change in the relationship between corporations and

audiences that carries perilous meanings for the future roles of feminists and practices of

female citizenship in global consumer culture. CFRB offers a rich site for unpacking the

production and consumption of popular meanings of feminism, social change, female

citizenship, and female beauty at this cultural moment.

Dove Gets the Word Out

Dove is a brand of personal care products such as soaps, body washes, and body lotions

manufactured by the Unilever Corporation. Since 1957, Dove’s mainstay product has been the

Beauty Bar. In 2002, Unilever reassessed Dove’s marketing strategy with its public relations firm,

Edelman, and its advertising/marketing agency, Ogilvy & Mather, to create a unified global

image to generate brand loyalty. Discussing her view of the global brand, Ogilvy’s Chairman

and Chief Executive Officer Shelly Lazarus stated, “It means figuring out what is universal about

the brand–those things that transcend where it happens to be manufactured, or where it

started” (O’Barr, Lazarus & Moreira 2008). Lazarus’s statement indicates that in today’s market, a

brand needs to reach audiences’ emotions by building a platform that drives ideological

alliance with the corporate identity before the act of material consumption.

CFRB was largely shaped by women in industry and as research subjects. Female

members of Ogilvy & Mather’s CFRB team included Lazarus, two creative directors, an art

director, a writer, and producer. Lazarus is a graduate of Smith College (an all-women’s

institution listing numerous feminist icons among its alumni), where she sat on its Board

of Trustees. Although Lazarus has not publicly aligned herself with feminism, others

have identified her as “a strong feminist . . . Yet Lazarus’s feminist love of economic

empowerment prevents her from acknowledging the ways in which capitalism can hurt the

powerless” (Dyer 2004, p. 191). Moreover, Dove commissioned women2 to direct its

foundational research and conduct much of the Campaign’s research.

The construction of CFRB was based on Dove’s 2003 global research study, “The Real

Truth About Beauty.” This research involved the participation of thirty-two hundred

women, ages eighteen through sixty-four, in ten countries, in a twenty to twenty-five-

minute long telephone interview. The study found that less than 2 percent of women feel

beautiful; 75 percent want representations of women to reflect diversity through age,

shape, and size; and 76 percent want the media to portray beauty as more than physical

(Etcoff, Orbach, Scott & D’Agostino 2004). These responses suggested a market for a new

philosophy of beauty that was “a great opportunity to differentiate the brand from every

[other] beauty brand” (Fielding, Lewis, White, Manfredi & Scott 2008), according to

Alessandro Manfredi, Dove’s Global Brand Director. CFRB has been identified as a cause

marketing effort (Lachover & Brandes 2009), which associates corporate identities with

social problems to benefit the corporate image, “distracting attention from their [the

corporation’s] connections as to why these social problems continue to exist” (Stole 2008,

p. 21). This article advances that CFRB is a cause branding strategy that merges messages of

corporate “concern and commitment for a cause” (Cone 2000) with the participation of

women and girls for the same social goals, further concealing corporate aims.

In line with their findings, Dove announced its challenge to the dominant ideology of

beauty: it would feature “real” women and girls of “various ages, shapes and sizes”

(Campaign for Real Beauty 2008). The campaign launched in England in 2004, and was soon

exported to Canada and the United States; CFRB is currently marketed in thirty-five

84 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

countries.3 The branding strategy was executed through television and print advertising,

billboards, new media, and national and grassroots outreach. The Dove Self-Esteem Fund is

a brand extension that serves as the site for in-person and online workshops that provide

“self-esteem toolkits” for girls and “parent kits” for mothers/mentors. In the United States,

the Fund has partnered with multiple national nonprofit girls’ organizations (Girl Scouts,

Girls Inc., and Boys & Girls Clubs of America) to facilitate these workshops. As an example of

CFRB’s international events that engage female audiences, Dove “call[ed] on women from

the Middle East to write about someone they find beautiful and the reasons they see a

different kind of ‘real beauty.’ Participants could be treated to a luxury five-star treatment

for two” (Dove Exposes the Beauty Myth 2007) in return. The Dove Movement for Self-

Esteem launched in Canada and the United States in Fall 2010.

In the worldwide exportation of CFRB texts,4 Dove positioned their global brand

through unified messaging that translates its main idea in images and language suiting the

customs of each target geographic area. This analysis interrogates the branding texts

launched in the United States: six print texts that communicate the “real beauty” ideology, a

television commercial and a viral video (“True Colors” and “Evolution,” respectively) that

promote the Fund, and a website that advances the Movement.

Meaning Making about “Real Beauty”: Revealing Textual Meanings through Semiotics

Semiotics is a useful approach for teasing out denotative and connotative meanings in

media texts. Interrogating signs’ oppositional relations is central to examinations of ideological

meaning and power (Williamson 1978), as illuminating differences in meaning leads to an

understanding about the unfamiliar by comparing it with the familiar. The semiotic analysis

presented here decodes the ways in which CFRB’s signs about “real beauty” communicate

meanings of liberation and oppression. It unpacks CFRB’s print texts via their language, logos,

and positioning of bodies, thereby linking connotative chains of meaning that exploit similarity

and difference (Danesi 2002). To analyze CFRB’s television advertisement and viral video, the

latter of which bears similarity to the codes and conventions of television, media scholar John

Fiske’s (2000) work is helpful. These analytical categories include camera work, lighting, editing,

music, casting, setting, costume, make-up, and action.

Signs develop through social convention and audiences interpret them through

learned social codes that cohere to maintain hegemony (Seiter 1992). For semiotician Roland

Barthes, signs contribute to the creation of social myths, which convey social and political

meanings (Bignell 1997, p. 22). The myth’s veracity is shaped by its “distortion or forgetting of

alternative messages, so that the myth appears to be exclusively true, rather than one of a

number of different possible messages” (1997, p. 22). At this level of signification, many

connotations attach to a sign to comprise a social myth, such as “real beauty.” Myth in CFRB is

examined as a means of branding the corporation as a feminist advocate for women (although

this strategy oppresses women) as well as a process of self-branding women and girls as

empowered “real beauties” (although they circulate in culture as signs of corporate identity).

A Feminist Perspective on Beauty

In the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, the beauty and fashion industries have

produced powerful media images communicating the dominant ideology of female beauty

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 85

as ultra-thin, tall, sexual bodies. Consumption of these images has resulted in a cultural

norm of women and girls disciplining their bodies (Bordo 2003). The beauty industry’s

discourse connects ideological and physical nonconformity to the dominant ideology with

a woman’s inability to fulfill her gender role or experience happiness (Bartky 1990). The

struggle of women and girls to physically emulate media images has manifested itself in

eating disorders and body image issues, while the lack of a fulfilled identification may result

in low self-esteem (Kilbourne 1999).

Dove’s stated call to arms echoes feminist and feminist media studies scholarship that

addresses how representations in popular culture convey often-problematic meanings of

gender and beauty. In its advocacy of women’s rights and egalitarian roles, the feminist

position argues for social change of oppressive social structures (Dworkin 1974). By

contrast, the postfeminist position contends that gender equality and female

empowerment have been achieved in the public sphere. Postfeminism has immense

power in western culture, as noted by feminist media studies scholar Rosalind Gill, who

names our current time a “postfeminist media culture” (2007, p. 249). Significantly, she

advances that postfeminism can be interpreted as “a sensibility” (2007, p. 254) whose

messaging includes:

the notion that femininity is a bodily property; the shift from objectification to

subjectification; the emphasis upon self-surveillance, monitoring and discipline; a focus

upon individualism, choice and empowerment; the dominance of a makeover paradigm;

the articulation or entanglement of feminist and antifeminist ideas . . . and an emphasis

upon consumerism and the commodification of difference. (Rosalind Gill 2007)

The postfeminist position easily aligns with corporate interests, situating messages of

women’s freedom in the marketplace as “empowered consumer[s]” (Tasker & Negra 2007,

p. 2). This identity lies at the intersection of consumerism and neoliberal governmentality,

thereby separating meanings of female citizenship from civic engagement (Mcrobbie 2008,

p. 533). The emergent neoliberal postfeminist citizen links meanings of empowerment and

choice to ideological and material consumption.

The postfeminist citizen’s pursuit of beauty engages her consumer power and self-

governance, aligning her identity with the goals of institutional power. In postfeminist

media culture, the body is a site of attention for the postfeminist citizen since it is promoted

as integral to female identity (Gill 2007, p. 255). Consumption of the dominant ideology of

beauty involves absorbing representations and meanings of hypersexual women and,

increasingly, girls. Agreement with these messages may make it difficult for postfeminist

citizens to understand their sexuality in “healthy, and progressive ways” (Durham 2008,

p. 39). This feminist analysis will consider the political, social, and economic meanings in

CFRB’s texts and address how female identity may be shaped as postfeminist citizenship

through the myth of “real beauty.”

Self-Branding by Embracing Popular Feminism

A strategy for accomplishing audience identification with texts is the co-option of

discourse; importantly, such appropriation highlights social issues as a means of generating

sales (Danesi 2002). Alignment with co-opted subcultural signs allows consumers to think

of themselves as insurgents; yet, since their rebellion occurs through consumerism, they do

not “pay the social price of true non-conformity and dissent” (Danesi 2002, p. 197).

86 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

Sociologist Robert Goldman terms this tactic “commodity feminism,” wherein advertisers

attempt “to reincorporate the cultural power of feminism” (Goldman 1992, p. 130) and, in so

doing, depoliticize the feminist message.

Commodity feminism takes on new meaning in a consumer culture characterized by

branding, a marketing strategy that trademarks corporate identity and is a “social,

economic and existential reality” (Arvidsson 2006, p. 14). Branding utilizes techniques of

persuasion to make the brand become a seamless part of individuals’ everyday lives. Media

scholar Adam Arvidsson argues that a brand’s value arises from its strategies that “manage

and program human communication and appropriate the ethical surplus–he common–

that it produces as a sort of value” (Arvidsson 2006, p. 13). Thus, when people purchase a

brand based on the corporate identity that has been attached to it, socialization occurs

through a common association with the brand. Their socialization, then, is mediated

through the brand’s role in their lives, and their attachment to the brand secures its place in

culture and social networks.

Branding enlists audiences to support a corporate brand identity that is managed by

the corporation to produce its desired outcome. In turn, audiences’ agency is limited by

corporate desires because “Brands are a kind of de-territorialized factory where the

productive mass intellectuality and the new forms of surveillance” (Arvidsson 2006, p. 94)

converge in consumer culture. Importantly for this study, cause branding is a specific type

of branding that blends corporate and individual identities through brand communication

and audience participation. Cause branding “falls at the intersection of corporate strategy

and citizenship and is fast becoming a ‘must do’ practices [sic] for the 21st century” (Cone

2000), therefore positioning corporations to implement their identities to attract and retain

consumers through a depth of involvement that draws on their emotions, actions, and

identities to drive brand commitment.

It is important to consider the practice of self-branding when thinking about girls and

women who consume cause branding messages. While media studies scholars have

examined the meanings of textual signs, a study of current consumer culture entails an

exploration of the ways in which individuals are encouraged to become a self-branded

“commodity sign” (Hearn 2008, p. 201) using “the narrative and visual codes” (Hearn 2008, p.

198) promoted by institutional power (corporations, advertisers, and so on). Self-branding

suggests that the audience-as-sign is a cultural product that sits at the nexus of consumed

media messages, social interactions, and identity development shaped by postfeminist

media culture. This analysis considers how CFRB’s meanings of popular feminism and social

change convey the message that audiences should self-brand as postfeminist “real” beauties.

The Current Study: Liberation and Oppression in “Real Beauty”

This section presents a feminist semiotic analysis of CFRB’s print, television, and new

media texts. These branding texts will be presented in chronological order of their entry

into popular culture. The myth of “real beauty” will be teased out through a textual

interrogation of the theme of liberation and oppression.

CFRB Print Texts

CFRB’s texts integrate feminist politics from the three waves5 through the pictorial

signs of “real” women and the use of feminist discourse to foster audience identification

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 87

based on physical attributes, age, and generational feminist politics. The pictorial signs of

women signify their age, which corresponds with a feminist wave, and all the women are

photographed against a white background. These images inaugurate the campaign’s

mission with representations of five women of distinctly varied ages, signifying a unification

of women from the three waves. The first word of CFRB—“Campaign”—acknowledges a

political intention. Linguistic signs in the CFRB texts connote the politics of the feminist

waves: specifically, the first wave’s focus on suffrage; the second wave’s focus on

collective—“we”—political action by women; and the third wave’s focus on individual

difference—in gender, ethnicity, race, etc.—or micro-politics. The print launch comprised

six images: portraits of five women (three close-ups of faces and two body shots at a

distance) and one composite picture of them.6 The five women pose with questions that

address the dominant ideology of beauty; each question offers two options as a response.

The CFRB manifesto accompanies the composite image, stating:

For too long, beauty has been defined by narrow, unattainable stereotypes. It’s time to

change all that. Because Dove believes real beauty comes in many shapes, sizes, colors

and ages. It’s why we started the campaign for real beauty. And why we hope you’ll take

part. Together, let’s think, talk, debate and learn how to make beauty real again. Cast your

vote at campaignforrealbeauty.com. (Dove Manifesto 2004)

The three close-up photos represent women from each wave. Their images are

accompanied by ballot boxes next to descriptive labels, posed as questions: “wrinkled?

wonderful?” (First Wave), “gray? gorgeous?” (Second Wave) and “flawed? flawless?” (Third

Wave) The dark-skinned ninety-ish woman wearing a colorful headscarf smiles, with the

text beside her asking, “Will society ever accept old can be beautiful?” This query signifies

the difficulties involved in changing societal views regarding the role of women (First Wave;

Figure 1). The smiling fifty-ish Caucasian woman wears a black turtleneck and, looking over

her shoulder at the audience, the text beside her raises the only question of those in this set

that invites discussion, rather than a yes/no response: “Why aren’t women glad to be gray?”

This question signifies the consciousness-raising ideology of dialogue relevant to her era

(Second Wave). The text beside the twenty-ish, red-haired Caucasian woman, wearing a

white tank top, poses a question that seemingly derives from her freckled appearance,

“Does beauty mean looking like everyone else?” This inquiry signifies the ideology of

difference in her wave (Third Wave; Figure 2).

Additionally, two women belonging to the Third Wave are photographed from head

to thighs and are presented next to the ballot box signifier. One image (“half empty? half

full?”; Figure 3) depicts a slim, smiling, short-haired, small-breasted black woman in a white

tank top and jeans with her hands in her back pockets; the text beside her breast questions,

“Does sexiness depend on how full your cups are?” This phrasing suggests optimism or

pessimism, an intertextual reference to the rhetorical expression, “Is the glass half empty or

half full?” The other image (“oversized? outstanding?”; Figure 4)7 depicts a full-figured,

smiling, large-breasted Caucasian woman in a strapless black cocktail dress with hands

crossed behind her head; the text, positioned at her hips, asks, “Does true beauty only

squeeze into a size 6?” Both of their confidently smiling visages connote an optimistic, “real

beauty” answer to the ballot box question posed next to them. The full-figured woman has

a confident posture, with arrows created by her arms and elbows that direct the audience

to the bare skin above her breasts and on her arms. The thin woman draws attention to her

lean body by positioning her hands at her back, which highlights her small circumference;

88 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

her mid-section, clothed in a white tank top, blends in with the background, again

highlighting her slim physique. Likewise, the freckled woman (Figure 2) reveals her thin

upper body through a barely-there tank top, its placement offering another meaning of

“flawed? flawless” as referencing her breast size. The representations of these Third-Wave

women problematize the cultural issues of breast size and body weight that signify female

sexuality. Women, regardless of race or class, have attempted to resolve self-esteem

problems arising from a perceived deficit in these sites on the body through potentially

self-harming diets and/or plastic surgery. The casting of these women, however, based on

their physical attributes, inherently objectifies these images, as their bodies are employed

by Dove to promote ideological and economic consumption by audiences.

The composite representation of all five women is accompanied by the CFRB

manifesto. Their images appear in a strip above the linguistic signifiers, beginning on the

left with the First-Wave woman. Her image stands apart from the group, as she is separated

Figure 1

“wrinkled? wonderful?” Copyright 2004 Ogilvy & Mather.

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 89

by more space and appears to be of a slightly larger size. In addition, her representation is

the only one that differs from the individual ballot box image, as here she is cropped mid-

breast and thus some of her clothing is visible; also, in this composite image her head is not

cropped. Her bright headscarf, white strapless top with a black horizontal line (the only

clothing that blends black and white), front facing body positioning, and location as the

first woman in the strip of images, all draw attention to her image as the most dominant,

connoting her wave’s leadership role in the feminist movement. In relation to her pictorial

sign, the CFRB mission statement connotes that Dove, like the First-Wave feminists, is an

agent of social change. However, the corporate message is visually constructed as more

important than the women: the paragraph of copy occupies more space on the page than

all the women together, the text occupies more vertical space than the strip of photos, and

the copy concludes with a blue color whose length and vibrancy are more visually

compelling than the women. Further, this blue copy relays information about Dove and

CFRB: the campaign website, the Dove icon, and a request to “Cast your vote.” The copy

emphasizes Dove as the organizer, catalyst, and vehicle for change: “it’s time to change all

that . . . it’s why we started the campaign for real beauty.” CFRB’s texts connote a

Figure 2

“flawed? flawless?” Copyright 2004 Ogilvy & Mather.

90 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

hegemonic relationship between the “real” women (who represent the liberation of

women) and the corporation (as the site for the elimination of women’s oppression). In this

sense, the texts are a means to position Dove to usurp the power of women and the

feminist movement in this mission of “real beauty.” CFRB’s strategy raises questions about

the politics of women’s participation in the Campaign, as will be discussed.

The message of “real beauty” in these texts functions as a social myth wherein the

denotative signs of liberation oppose the connotative signs of oppression in the depictions

of “real” women. The central meaning of “real beauty” in these texts is connected to a

voting device; the linguistic sign “cast your vote” connotes the feminist value of suffrage,

however, CFRB is not an election. By tallying the votes on publicly displayed interactive

billboards and on the CFRB website, the women become objects for approval or

disapproval by the “real” judgment of global audiences, with potentially disempowering

consequences for the “real” women. Moreover, CFRB’s oppressive construction of these

signifiers—wherein the voter is able to select only one option—does not allow for debate,

Figure 3

“half empty? half full?” Copyright 2004 Ogilvy & Mather.

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 91

and also limits the audience’s freedom of expression. Such devices facilitate Dove’s

authority to oppress “real women” and the audiences who identify with and even judge

them.

Self-Esteem Fund: Television and Viral Video

Dove took CFRB’s messaging “a step further and [focused on] talk about self-esteem”

(Branding Evolution 2007) by launching two texts in 2006 to brand the Dove Self-Esteem

Fund, which was established by and is primarily financed by Unilever/Dove. These texts

encourage ideological identification for girls and adult female audiences (mentors/-

mothers). Girl audiences may identify with the “real” girls in CFRB’s television advertisement

and viral video through sharing their physical attributes, ages, and, significantly, their

emotional states. These texts are designed to arouse emotions against the dominant

ideology of beauty and garner support for “real beauty.” The mentors’/mothers’

Figure 4

“oversized? outstanding?” Copyright 2004 Ogilvy & Mather.

92 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

identification is mobilized through acceptance of the Fund’s leadership and mission: to

save girls’ psychological and physical health via an emphasis on “self-esteem” (a crucial

component of the “real beauty” ideology). Women can also economically bond with Dove

by making donations to the Fund.

“True Colors” debuted during the February 2006 Superbowl XL Game, at a cost of $2.4

million dollars for forty-six seconds. The spot ran during this time to make contact with the

largest audience possible, in keeping with Dove’s goal (which was achieved) of reaching

one million young girls by 2008. In “True Colors,” Dove represents itself as a facilitator and

problem-solver, declaring: “let’s change their minds/we’ve created the Dove self-esteem

fund/because every girl deserves to feel good about herself/and see how beautiful . . . she

really is/ help us . . . get involved at” the CFRB website. In “Evolution” (launched eight

months later), Dove establishes its credibility as a leader by exposing the construction of

unattainable beauty at the initial site of production (the studio set) and in the technological

space (the software program, Photoshop). At the end of the text, Dove asks girls, mothers,

and mentors to “Take part in the Dove Real Beauty Workshop for Girls” through the CFRB

website.

“True Colors” offers a range of emotions in the expressions of “real” girls of various

sizes and ethnicities. The emotional song, “True Colors,” is performed by The Girl Scouts

Chorus. At first, the girls’ faces reflect innocence or ambivalence, bolstered by linguistic

signs connoting feelings of victimization—“hates her freckles,” “thinks she’s ugly,” “wishes

she were blonde,” “afraid she’s fat”—because they do not meet the dominant ideology of

beauty. The lyrics simultaneously elevate the poignant portraits and offer an intimate

relationship with the person (“I”) in the music and the girls in the text: “Show me a smile

then, don’t be unhappy, can’t remember when, I last saw you laughing, If this world makes

you crazy and you’ve taken all you can bear, You call me up, because you know I’ll be there.”

Halfway through the video, an emotional shift occurs following the encouraging syntagm,

“Let’s change their minds” against a white background. The lyrics also become positive:

“And I’ll see your true colors shining through.” Accompanying this phrase is a group of

smiling girls euphorically pumping their hands in the air, an intertextual reference to the

feminist iconic image of “Rosie the Riveter,” whose slogan was “We Can Do It!” Another

phrase, “We’ve created the Dove Self-Esteem Fund,” appears next, also against a white

background. Smiling girls appear throughout the rest of the text, accompanying Dove’s

announcement of leadership via the Fund and the lyrics: “I see your true colors, And that’s

why I love you, So don’t be afraid, To let them show, You’re beautiful like a rainbow.” The

white background on which the pivotal text for the film’s message appears signifies light,

symbolizing Dove as the caring narrator (“I”) and the ray of light illuminating the public

perception of female beauty and girls’ “real beauty.”

“Evolution” launched on YouTube at no cost to Dove or Ogilvy & Mather other than

its production expenses. Near its commencement, a screen displays the words “a Dove

film.” Although Dove’s “film” is brief (seventy-four seconds) and not presented in a

traditional cinematic space (like a movie theater), this label allows Dove to appropriate the

aims of feminist documentary filmmaking, which serves as a medium for raising social

awareness (Byerly & Ross 2006). Two types of feminist filmmaking emerged during the

second wave: one offered alternative images to gender stereotypes in the service of

self-expression, and the other deconstructed the film medium “to expose the ideological

(patriarchal) apparatus beneath” (de Lauretis paraphrased by Byerly & Ross 2006, p. 84).

CFRB employs both: “True Colors” (although not stated as a “film”) offers an alternate

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 93

component of beauty (self-esteem) wherein self-perception of beauty does not rely on

conformity to the social standard, while “Evolution” exposes the ideology of beauty

through its deconstruction of a media text.

“Evolution” depicts a woman’s makeover using the tools (physical, technological) that

are employed by the beauty industry to transform a “real” woman into a supermodel. The

subject appears to be in her twenties and sits on a stool, staring without affect into the

camera. Bright lights suddenly turn on; the footage speeds up in a choppy, fast-forward

simulation; and music plays in synchrony with the rapid projection of images. The woman is

presented as a site of work for make-up artists and hair stylists. During the transformation,

the camera zooms in on her face, removing any indicators of her tank top to imply a state of

undress. The image is manipulated using Photoshop, and her final representation as the

dominant beauty appears on a billboard that two girls walk past and briefly acknowledge,

connoting acceptance of the manufactured image as a cultural norm.

The syntagm at the conclusion of the film, “no wonder our perception of beauty is

distorted,” implicitly acknowledges a social problem that relates to the dominant ideology.

However, the ambiguous use of the word “our” suggests that Dove (and perhaps other

corporations) as well as women, men, and countless other factors are culpable for the

problematic of beauty. Finally, the logo that appears with the syntagm, “the Dove self-

esteem fund” shows the upward flight of three blue doves in ascending size (from small to

large). The color blue symbolizes “trust, loyalty, wisdom, confidence, intelligence, faith,

truth, and heaven” (Color Wheel Pro 2010). The three doves perhaps symbolize the

corporation/institutional power, the mother/mentor, and the daughter/girl, although

which set of doves symbolizes which conceptual pair is ambiguous. Their upward direction

connotes unity and positive direction for the future. However, this optimistic sign diverts

from the messaging, which positions the corporation to usurp the feminist role of

engendering social change for women and displaces the influential role of the women who

share girls’ everyday lives onto institutional power. Moreover, through the Fund, Dove asks

mothers/mentors and girls to endorse the oppressive female role as an ideological and

material consumer.

Dove Movement for Self-Esteem

The Dove Movement for Self-Esteem is primarily an online branding strategy through

social media and the corporate website. Achieving online popularity (over ten million

views) and more popular discourse for the brand than “True Colors” (and for minimal cost),

The Movement may be an effort drawing on the success of “Evolution” as a low cost, high

impact text. It is a site of interactivity, a critical process for understanding the agency and

subjectivity of users.

The Movement continues CFRB’s global conversation about beauty with the aim of

“building a world where women everywhere have the tools to inspire each other and the

girls in their lives” (About the Movement 2010). The Movement and CFRB share the same

ideology but use slightly different terms to suggest their own uniqueness and, perhaps,

reinvention. For instance, CFRB does not appear on the Movement’s site, but a link is

offered to Dove’s homepage on which CFRB is listed (though not prominently). Further,

CFRB and the Movement have partnerships with the same nonprofit organizations but call

them by different names (for CFRB, “self-esteem partners”; for the Movement, “partner

organizations”). Much like the political intention in “Campaign,” the word “Movement”

94 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

denotes a group that engages women’s participation (like the feminist movement). This

terminology displaces the feminist role more overtly than the Fund texts. The Movement

emphasizes users’ participation as a prerequisite for liberation, which may be likened to

collective activism (similar to the Second Wave).

The Movement brings together the “real beauty” ideology from CFRB’s print texts with

the Fund’s positioning of Dove as the site for women’s and girls’ activism. The centerpiece of

the Movement is acceptance of its mission, which is executed when women and girls

acknowledge their participation by signing a “declaration” to “Join the Movement.” A

declaration denotatively affords power to the audience by offering the opportunity to make

a choice and assert oneself. Yet the Movement’s language communicates a hegemonic

relationship between the corporate leader and its followers, asking users to join “our

Movement,” “our vision,” and “our cause.” The declaration itself amounts to providing their

email address, first and last name, zip code, and age, as well as an answer to an “optional”

question: “What advice would you give to your 13 year old self? We’ll collect these messages

and deliver them to girls to build self-esteem in the next generation” (Our Vision: Join Us

2010).

Minimization of the only question that may stimulate self-care suggests that the

purpose of the declaration is for Unilever/Dove to gather demographic information. After all,

corporations can “expand revenue opportunities, broaden markets, and reinforce viewer

commitments” (Jenkins 2006, p. 18) by using new media “designed to be more responsive to

consumer feedback” (Jenkins 2006, p. 133). That the Movement may be using the declaration

to create a list of consumers under the guise of participation for social change is not

surprising: CFRB was formulated on the findings from a global research study and Dove has

conducted numerous global and national studies8 throughout the Campaign. The

Movement can be seen as a form of market research, and the Movement’s participants are

its research subjects. The work of media studies theorist Mark Andrejevic is of particular

importance here, as he contends that it is critical to question the politics of participation by

users, who may be involved in “the labor of detailed information gathering and

comprehensive monitoring . . . in the name of their own empowerment . . . and to view such

participation as a form of power sharing” (2007, p. 15). Scholarship on Dove’s user-generated

marketing raises issues of users’ labor on behalf of the brand (Duffy 2010) and users’

discourse may support the patriarchal view that women’s role is to pursue the dominant

ideology (Lachover & Brandes 2009). In light of these voices, the Movement’s declaration

serves as a contractual agreement between audiences and the “real beauty” ideology, whose

potential for the liberation of women and girls is questionable. The myth of “real beauty” may

be shaping subjectivities by enlisting audiences’ labor, as will be discussed next.

Producing a Postfeminist Campaign and Self-Branded Postfeminist Citizenship

CFRB and its brand extensions (the Fund and the Movement) created and advanced a

myth of “real beauty.” This ideology mandates female audiences to practice psychological

self-improvement and physical subjectification as a means of liberation from the dominant

ideology of beauty. This section explores the production (concentrating on the politics of

women’s participation in CFRB) and potential consumption (in connection with self-

branded identity and postfeminist citizenship) of “real beauty” to consider its promise to

facilitate audience liberation.

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 95

In addition to the aforementioned participation of women from Ogilvy & Mather, CFRB’s

partnership with the Woodhull Institute for Ethical Leadership further highlights women’s

involvement in this branding strategy. Woodhull is a nonprofit women’s organization named

after feminist Victoria Woodhull. Its website describes its partnership by employing the key

words of feminist activism—“social change”: “The Woodhull Institute of Ethical Leadership has

partnered with the Dove CFRB to share success building tools through online training sessions

that promote ethical development and empower women to act as agents of positive social

change” (Woodhull 2007). Of note, Woodhull’s co-founder and most public figure is Naomi

Wolf, who may be known to popular audiences for her bestselling critique of the beauty

industry, The Beauty Myth. Three years later, Wolf advocated a postfeminist position in her

subsequent (and lesser known) book. However, for audiences who remember Wolf from her

argument in The Beauty Myth and are not versed in postfeminism, this partnership may pose

conflicting meanings of feminist involvement with the beauty industry. As one journalist notes,

“To go from writing The Beauty Myth to touring with Dove and singing its praises is a big jump”

(M.K. Johnson 2008). At the same time, the author optimistically queries whether Wolf is

actually “spreading her message about the hypocrisy of the beauty industry, all on Dove’s

dime? Savvy audience members would certainly catch the irony, and Dove can laugh all the

way to the bank. Everybody wins” (M.K. Johnson 2008).

Several “self-esteem” partners (nonprofit girls’ organizations that draw on feminist

ideologies) similarly bolster CFRB/Dove’s credibility to audiences. The participation of these

female-focused groups extends the brand into community spaces in a grassroots way that

may read as “feminist” for popular audiences. These groups thereby function as a kin network

that aids in the development of a CFRB community. The strategy surrounding Dove with

these partnerships may operate to reduce popular attention to Unilever’s other brands; after

all, Unilever manufactures Slimfast (a diet plan), Fair & Lovely Fairness Cream (a skin

lightening product), and Axe deodorant (whose advertisements, targeted at men, portray

objectified women). Unilever’s ownership structure suggests it is a site of fractured

ideological credibility that circulates knotty popular meanings of feminism and social change.

By asking girls and women to partner with the corporate ideology in a similar manner

as the aforementioned organizations, The Movement potentially enlists global postfeminist

citizenship through the support of yet another oppressive beauty ideology. By signing the

declaration, girls and women work to become neoliberal subjects who accept responsibility

to develop and perform Dove-approved “self-esteem” behaviors (requiring self-judgment

and self-monitoring of one’s emotional state) that are integral to the pursuit of “real

beauty.” Joining the Movement aligns its participants with neoliberal governmentality and,

thus, postfeminist citizenship, as “Self-esteem is a technology of citizenship and self-

government for evaluating and acting upon our selves so that the police, the guards and

the doctors do not have to” (Cruikshank 1993, p. 330). Finally, audiences’ compliance with

the “real beauty” ideology allows Dove to distance itself from its cultural role as a producer

of the dominant ideology by placing the responsibility for women’s and girls’ lack of self-

esteem on themselves.

CFRB’s cause branding strategy thereby engages female citizenship through

consumerism. This fusion of participation in and consumption of “real beauty” suggests

that female audiences will voluntarily shape their identity through the practice of self-

branding. By branding themselves as “a real beauty,” girls and women derive their identity

from internalization of the meanings and representations produced by Dove to align

themselves with the postfeminist citizen who obeys CFRB’s rules in the name of

96 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

empowerment. Becoming “a real beauty” necessitates ideological and material labor on the

self that originates from acceptance of the “real beauty” myth: support of CFRB’s

hegemonic views of female beauty, agreement with Dove as the site for social change and

female activism about beauty (even if it displaces the roles of feminists, mothers, and

mentors in individuals’ lives and in cultural ideology), work to achieve Dove’s meaning of

self-esteem, and embrace of women’s traditional role as consumers.

While CFRB denotatively associates “real beauty” with diversity and independence, its

connotative signs stand in stark contrast to those values. In fact, self-branding oneself as “a

real beauty” enlists conformity: labor to become part of an “inventor[y] of branded selves”

(Hearn 2008, p. 211) from which Dove profits “by packaging, branding them, and selling

them back to themselves” (Hearn 2008, p. 209). Moreover, regardless of their awareness as

self-branders, women and girls—by virtue of this process—become “global value subjects.

They are product, producer, and consumer, but they do not control the means of their own

distribution” (Hearn 2008, p. 213). By signing the Movement’s declaration, women declare

themselves postfeminist citizens whose labor and “real” identity serve the aims of

institutional power.

The rationale for women’s and feminists’ support of CFRB may lie in the postfeminist

belief that contemporary women are consumers with agency. Or, feminists might welcome

CFRB’s representations as a positive change in a mediascape that is otherwise saturated with

the dominant ideology of beauty. It is important to stress, however, that the feminist task is to

realize social change that revolutionizes social structures, not to support corporate strategies

that seek audiences’ brand attachment. While CFRB and the Movement do not liberate

female audiences from an oppressive ideology of beauty, women’s (and men’s) participation

in CFRB may have liberated CFRB/Dove from “a ‘cluttered’ [media] environment in which

there are more and more messages [that] must have [to find] a way to break through the

attendant noise” (Jhally 2003, p. 253) by developing a postfeminist-supported branding

strategy.

Ultimately, it seems that “who wins” in CFRB’s effort is the corporation. At first, CFRB

resulted in enormous financial success for Dove and industry acclaim for Ogilvy & Mather

and Edelman Public Relations, which spearheaded CFRB’s marketing. Sales figures indicate

that Dove’s revenues increased following its launch: 12.5 percent in 2005 and 10.1 percent

in 2006 (Neff 2007). In 2006, CFRB swept the highest awards9 in the advertising industry and

its sister industry, public relations. In 2007, however, sales growth dwindled to 1.2 percent

(Neff 2007), and industry pundits questioned whether sales were connected to

advertisements for Dove’s Pro-Age product line (featuring unclothed women over age

fifty) that perhaps “went a step too far in embracing aging in all its naked, wrinkled and

sagging glory” (Neff 2007). The same year, controversy over the realness of CFRB’s texts may

have impacted sales when retoucher Pascal Dangin implied in an interview that he had

altered the Pro-Age texts (Collins 2008). While Dove denied any textual modifications and

Dangin retracted his statements, the public realization that there had (or could have) been

retouching may have generalized to a lack of textual and brand authenticity. In 2008,

although the “brand reportedly gained $1.2 billion in value” (Molitor 2008) since CFRB’s

launch, Dove’s unhappiness with its sales led to a re-assessment of CFRB. The Movement

may be CFRB’s tactic to restore its integrity with audiences to bolster sales. Moreso than

previous CFRB strategies, the Movement incites ideological brand commitment through

focusing on women’s “depth of involvement, the engagement, the participation and the

commitment of moving people to take action” (Molitor 2008). The Movement may also be a

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 97

way for Dove to publicly emphasize the brand bond with consumers, thereby minimizing

the role of industry insiders.

“Real beauty” is an oppressive ideology that reinforces the value of female beauty

and its pursuit by garnering women’s agreement with its values of ideological and material

consumption. At its core is a paradox: while apparently decrying it, “real beauty” embraces

conformity to hegemonic beauty standards through both corporate instigation for brand

attachment and women’s striving to be part of what they may feel is a positive beauty

ideology. “Real beauty,” then, is “diluted by its contradictory imperative to promote self-

acceptance and at the same time increase sales by promoting women’s consumption of

products that encourage conformity to feminine beauty ideology” (Johnson & Taylor 2008,

p. 962). CFRB’s “real” women, whose beauty deviates from the beauty norm in size and/or

color, lend credibility to the campaign and invite female audiences to self-brand as a “real

beauty”; yet, this identity aligns with being a consumer of a corporate brand strategy that

positions itself in the feminist role as an advocate for social change that promises to

empower women. The stakes are high for audiences who agree with CFRB’s meanings of

“real beauty,” and may intensify when such popularized meanings of empowerment are

drawn on and reinforced as cultural norms by future brands. In addition, CFRB does not

work to create awareness about female beauty as a social issue that has institutional

underpinnings (for example, concretely addressing the links between eating disorders,

body image issues, and beauty industry discourse/images). Like cause marketing, this cause

branding strategy “is merely a cleverly disguised ploy to mask some of the fundamental

problems for which the very same marketing forces are directly or indirectly responsible”

(Stole 2008, p. 34). Within this consumer context, commercial connotations are attached to

popular messages and practices of philanthropy (Stole 2008).

There is much work to be done to arrive at a strong collective feminist voice of what

empowering female beauty means for current and future audiences. As feminist media

studies scholar Angela McRobbie suggests, this action may “entail the resuscitation and re-

conceptualization of feminist anti-capitalism” (2008, p. 548). The “real beauty” myth serves

as a cautionary example of how institutional messaging about the democratization of

female beauty connotes a hegemonic relationship between the corporation and female

audiences, reframes the dominant ideology of beauty, and endorses the spread of

postfeminist citizenship. CFRB’s partnership between female cultural producers and a

corporation is problematic at best.

Conclusion

There is a complicated relationship between corporate strategies and the production

and consumption of popular meanings of feminism, social change, and female citizenship

in postfeminist media culture. This study has argued that CFRB’s cause branding strategy

perpetuates an oppressive ideology of “real beauty” requiring a behavior (“self-esteem”)

that underscores neoliberal self-improvement benefiting the corporation’s power. CFRB’s

textual signs revealed a significant theme in feminist politics (liberation and oppression) in

the communication of the “real beauty” ideology, whose consumption may involve

women’s and girls’ self-branding as “a real beauty” and postfeminist citizenship. Further

research might unpack female audiences’ meanings about “real beauty” and self-branding

practices, as well as CFRB’s messaging of “real beauty” and its interpretations in non-English

speaking countries.

98 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

NOTES

1. Countries represented at The G(irls) 20 Summit and the G20 Summit are Argentina,

Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, France, Germany, India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Mexico,

Russia, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, South Korea, Turkey, UK, USA and the European Union.

2. Women who participated included Dr. Jennifer Scott and Heidi D’Agostino of research firm

StrategyOne; Dr. Nancy Etcoff, Harvard psychologist; and Dr. Susie Orbach, author of Fat is a

Feminist Issue.

3. See “Welcome to Dove” for a list of countries.

4. Industry insiders confirmed that there is no single database for global CFRB texts. A search

of texts in the major markets where CFRB was created (the UK, the US, and Canada) found

minor differences in the images and language that did not substantially alter the

messaging. The US texts were selected since they are among the first set of texts, the

United States is a major market, and they were accessible. This analysis thus focuses on the

US texts.

5. The feminist movement is generally regarded as comprising three “waves” whose dates are

as follows: the first wave occurred from the late nineteenth century to the 1930s; the second

wave occurred from the 1960s to the 1980s; the third wave began in the 1990s and

characterizes the present time.

6. The author was granted permission to reproduce the First-Wave and Third-Wave portraits

and Third-Wave body shots, but not the Second-Wave portrait and composite portrait of the

women (these images, accordingly, are not included in the article).

7. The UK version says, “fat? fit?” and the Canadian version asks, “fat? fab?” These sentiments

are strikingly similar to the US version.

8. “Beyond Stereotypes” (2005) collected information from 3,300 girls and women from ten

countries; “Beauty Comes of Age” (2006) surveyed 1,450 women from nine countries; and

“Real Girls, Real Pressure” (2008) surveyed 1,029 American girls.

9. Awards include: Cannes Advertising’s Grand Effie Award, Cannes’ Film Grand Prix and Cyber

Grand Prix, Global Campaign of the Year by Advertising Age, Consumer Launch Campaign

of the Year by PR Week, and Best of Silver Anvil Award from the Public Relations Society of

America.

REFERENCES

ABOUT THE MOVEMENT (WEB PAGE) (2010) Dove/Unilever, [Online] Available at: http://www.

dovemovement.com/movement/about (1 November 2010).

ANDREJEVIC, MARK (2007) iSpy: Surveillance and Power in the Interactive Era, University Press of

Kansas, Lawrence.

ARVIDSSON, ADAM (2006) Brands: Meaning and Value in Media Culture, Routledge, New York.

BARTKY, SANDRA LEE (1990) Femininity and Domination: Studies in the Phenomenology of Oppression,

New York, Routledge.

BIGNELL, JONATHAN (1997) Media Semiotics: An Introduction, St. Martin’s Press, New York.

BORDO, SUSAN (2003) Unbearable Weight: Feminism, Western Culture, and the Body, University of

California Press, Berkeley.

BRANDING EVOLUTION: THE DOVE STORY (WEB PAGE) (2007) The Manufacturer, [Online] Available at:

http://www.themanufacturer.com/us/content/5640/Branding_evolution%3A_the_Do-

ve_story (10 October 2010).

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 99

BYERLY, CAROLYN M. & ROSS, KAREN (2006) Women & Media: A Critical Introduction, Blackwell

Publishing, Malden.

CAMPAIGN FOR REAL BEAUTY (WEB PAGE) (2008) Dove/Unilever, [Online] Available at: http://www.dove.

us/#/CFRB/arti_cfrb.aspx[cp-documentid¼7049726]/ (1 April 2008).

COLLINS, LAUREN (2008) ‘Pixel perfect: Pascal Dangin’s virtual reality’, The New Yorker, [Online]

Available at: http://www.newyorker.com/reporting/2008/05/12/fa_fact_collins?currentPa-

ge¼all (14 May 2008).

COLOR WHEEL PRO (WEB PAGE) (2010) QSX Software Group, [Online] Available at: http://www.color-

wheel-pro.com/color-meaning.html (2 June 2008).

CONE, CAROL L. (2000) ‘Cause branding in the 21st century’, Public Service Advertising Research

Center, [Online] Available at: http://www.psaresearch.com/causebranding.html (5 October

2010).

CRUIKSHANK, BARBARA (1993) ‘Revolutions within: self-government and self-esteem’, Economy and

Society, vol. 22, no. 3, pp. 327–344.

DANESI, MARCEL (2002) Understanding Media Semiotics, Oxford Publishing Press, New York.

DOVE EXPOSES THE BEAUTY MYTH TO REVEAL ‘REAL BEAUTY’ TO WOMEN IN THE MIDDLE EAST (PRESS RELEASE ON

WEB PAGE) (2007) Dove/Unilever, [Online] Available at: http://www.campaignforrealbeauty.

ae/press.asp?url¼press.asp&section¼news&id¼7221 (3 June 2008).

DOVE MANIFESTO (PRINT) (2004) [Online] Available at: http://www.coloribus.com/adsarchive/prints/

dove-skincare-products-dove-manifesto-6606505/ (5 June 2008).

DUFFY, BROOKE ERIN (2010) ‘Empowerment through endorsement? Polysemic meaning in Dove’s

user-generated advertising’, Communication, Culture & Critique, vol. 3, pp. 26–43.

DURHAM, MEENAKSHI GIGI (2008) The Lolita Effect: The Media Sexualization of Young Girls and What

We Can Do About It, The Overlook Press, New York.

DWORKIN, ANDREA (1974) Woman Hating, E.P. Dutton, New York.

DYER, STEPHANIE (2004) ‘Lifestyles of the media rich and oligopolistic’, in Censored 2005: The Top 25

Censored Stories, ed. Peter Phillips, Seven Stories Press, New York.

ETCOFF, NANCY, ORBACH, SUSIE, SCOTT, JENNIFER & D’AGOSTINO, HEIDI (2004) ‘The real truth about

beauty: a global report: findings of the global study on women, beauty and well-being’

[Online] Available at: http://www.campaignforrealbeauty.com/uploadedfiles/

dove_white_paper_final.pdf (5 June 2008).

EVOLUTION. (videorecording) (2006) [Online] Available at: http://www.youtube.com/watch?-

v¼iYhCn0jf46U (10 October 2010).

FIELDING, DARYL, LEWIS, DENNIS, WHITE, MEL, MANFREDI, ALESSANDRO & SCOTT, LINDA (2008) ‘Dove

campaign roundtable’, Advertising & Society Review, vol. 9, no. 4 [Online] Project MUSE,

Available at: http://muse.jhu.edu.proxy.libraries.rutgers.edu/ (22 October 2010).

FISKE, JOHN (2000) ‘The codes of television’, in Media Studies: A Reader, eds Paul Marris & Sue

Thornham, New York University Press, New York, pp. 220–230.

GILL, ROSALIND (2007) Gender and the Media, Polity, Cambridge.

GOLDMAN, ROBERT (1992) Reading Ads Socially, Routledge, New York.

HEARN, ALISON (2008) ‘“Meat, mask, burden:” probing the contours of the branded “self,”’, Journal

of Consumer Culture, vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 197–217.

JENKINS, HENRY (2006) Convergence Culture: Where Old and New Media Collide, New York University

Press, New York.

JHALLY, SUT (2003) ‘Image-based culture: advertising and popular culture’, in Gender, Race, and

Class in Media: A Text-Reader, eds Gail Dines & Jean M. Humez, Sage Publications,

Thousand Oaks, CA.

100 DARA PERSIS MURRAY

JOHNSON, M. K. (2008) ‘Is Naomi wolf pulling punches for Dove’s real beauty campaign?’, Lucire,

[Online] Available at: http://lucire.com/insider/20080215/is-naomi-wolf-pulling-punches-

for-doves-real-beauty-campaign (10 June 2010).

JOHNSTON, JOSÉE & TAYLOR, JUDITH (2008) ‘Feminist consumerism and fat activists: a comparative

study of grassroots activism and the dove real beauty campaign’, Signs: Journal of Women

in Culture and Society, vol. 33, no. 4, pp. 941–966.

KILBOURNE, JEAN (1999) Can’t Buy My Love: How Advertising Changes the Way We Think and Feel,

Simon & Schuster, New York.

LACHOVER, EINAT & BRANDES, SIGAL BARAK (2009) ‘A beautiful campaign? Analysis of public discourse

in Israel surrounding the dove campaign for real beauty’, Feminist Media Studies, vol. 9, no.

3, pp. 301–316.

MCROBBIE, ANGELA (2008) ‘Young women and consumer culture: an intervention’, Cultural Studies,

vol. 22, no. 5, pp. 531–550.

MOLITOR, DORI (2008) ‘In dove we trust’, The Hub Magazine, [Online] Available at: http://www.

hubmagazine.com/html/2008/may_jun/womanwise.html (1 October 2010).

NEFF, JACK (2007) ‘Soft soap’, Advertising Age, vol. 78, no. 38, p. 1.

O’BARR, WILLIAM M., LAZARUS, SHELLY & MOREIRA, MARCIO (2008) ‘Global advertising’, Advertising &

Society Review, vol. 9, no. 4 [Online] Project MUSE, Available at: http://muse.jhu.edu.proxy.

libraries.rutgers.edu/ (1 October 2010).

OUR VISION: JOIN US (WEB PAGE) (2010) Dove/Unilever, [Online] Available at: http://www.

dovemovement.com/declaration/sign (5 October 2010).

SEITER, ELLEN (1992) ‘Semiotics, structuralism, and television’, in Channels of Discourse,

Reassembled: Television and Contemporary Criticism, ed. Robert C. Allen, The University

of North Carolina Press, Chapel Hill.

STOLE, INGER L. (2008) ‘Philanthropy as public relations: a critical perspective on cause marketing’,

International Journal of Communication, vol. 2, pp. 20–40.

TASKER, YVONNE & NEGRA, DIANE (2007) ‘Introduction: feminist politics and postfeminist culture’, in

Interrogating Postfeminism: Gender and the Politics of Popular Culture, eds Yvonne Tasker &

Diane Negra, Duke University Press, Durham, pp. 1–25.

TRUE COLORS (videorecording) (2006) [Online] Available at: http://video.google.com/videoplay?-

docid¼1731400614466797113# (2 June 2008).

WELCOME TO DOVE (web page) (2010) [Online] Available at: http://www.dove.com/?ref¼dove

(1 October 2010).

WILLIAMSON, JUDITH (1978) Decoding Advertisements: Ideology and Meaning in Advertising, Marion

Boyars Publishers, New York.

WOODHULL (WEB PAGE) (2007) The Woodhull Institute for Ethical Leadership, [Online] Available at:

http://www.woodhull.org/gallery/index.php (20 June 2008).

Dara Persis Murray is a doctoral candidate in Journalism and Media Studies at Rutgers

University, where she also completed a Certificate in Women’s and Gender Studies.

E-mail: [email protected]

BRANDING “REAL” SOCIAL CHANGE 101

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Branding Real Social Change in Dove s Campaign for Real Beauty.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Changing Business of News.pdf

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

2

Researched, written and edited by: Dr Penny O’Donnell, Department of Media and Communications, the University of Sydney Dr David McKnight, Journalism and Media Research Centre, the University of New South Wales Jonathan Este, The Walkley Foundation for Excellence in Journalism

The authors would like to thank the following for their assistance in compiling this report: Cathy Carey Mary Cotter Lauren Dixon Suzanne Egan Clare Fletcher Karol Foyle Sonya Gee Louisa Graham Margaret Harris Madeleine Hastie Karl Hilzinger Mitchell Hobbs Jacinta Isaacs Emily Jones Jacqueline Park Christopher Warren Amanda Wilson Newspix Fairfax Syndication

We would also like to express our appreciation to the more than 100 journalists and editors who gave us their time and the benefit of their insights and experience. Thanks also to the cartoonists and photographers whose work has enhanced this report.

This research project would not have been possible without the leadership and financial assistance of the Walkley Foundation for Excellence in Journalism and we would like to express our appreciation, especially to the Foundation’s director Jacqueline Park, for its support. We would also like to acknowledge the Foundation’s assistance in compiling this report.

This research on the future of newspapers in Australia was supported under Australian Research Council’s Linkage Projects funding scheme (project LP0990734). The views expressed herein are those of the authors and are not necessarily those of the Australian Research Council.

Cover illustration by Karl Hilzinger Design by Louise Summerton Gadfly Media

CONTENTS Foreword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Research design: what we did . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Issues #1: Why talk about “quality”?

Issues #2 Media watching: how digital are the Walkleys?

The changing business of news. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Issues #3: The continuing importance of newspaper journalism

Issues #4: Meeting the crisis?

The transition from print to multimedia journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Issues #5: Why can’t newspapers make digital dollars?

Issues #6: Digital-first journalism

Issues #7: Not just another business

Journalists’ changing relationships with readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Issues #8: From gatekeepers to conversationalists

Issues #9: The new competition

Future control over professional standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Issues #10: Rewarding excellence in digital journalism

Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

9

THE CHANGING BUSINESS OF NEWS

The newspaper business in Australia is now operating in uncharted waters. More than 1,000 journalists’ jobs have been lost in the last three years, with a consequent drop in newsroom capacity to produce the same quantity and quality of daily journalism – all with no guarantee that the digital destination will restore jobs or newsroom resources.

The key trends that emerge in this discussion of the changing business of news include:

$4.9 billion, but industry forecasters predict its future substitution by online publishing.

unclear who will pay for digital journalism. There are other, pre-existing structural problems in the news industry that exacerbate the current uncertainty, including falling circulations, increased press concentration, and tougher competition for audiences from television, radio and Internet news and information services.

to the current crisis by diversifying into non-newspaper businesses, restructuring news operations, adopting user-pays digital news models, and shedding staff. These strategies are directed to ensuring the newspaper business survives.

concerns about dwindling resources for “watchdog” or public interest journalism. The main newspaper publishers are upbeat about the future of journalism and reject any suggestion of market intervention to assist their industry as unwarranted and unnecessary.

In 2010, when the Media Alliance published Life in the Clickstream II, Australia’s newspaper industry appeared to have weathered turmoil in the news business far better than the US, UK or, closer to home, New Zealand. While the pace of change had quickened, with most major news companies extending their online news offerings, integrated newsrooms were still optional, tablets and apps were a novelty, and paywalls were an experiment in the making.

A few alarm bells had started ringing about news quality, with journalists expressing concerns about excessive workloads linked to print staff layoffs and increased demands for online output. In fact, some 50 per cent of those surveyed at the time, said the quality of news reporting and journalism was worse than it was five years earlier, compared to 15 per cent who said it had improved. Moreover, the Press Council’s 2008 State of the News Print Media Report documented problems adversely affecting the quality of journalism, including “churnalism” (the uncritical use of press releases as news stories), reliance on bloggers for news stories and images, and chequebook journalism.

Nonetheless, there were also positive indicators that newsrooms had accepted online news as “core newspaper business” and were gradually transforming themselves to meet the challenges of digital publishing. There were even signs that digital technology was delivering on the promise of greater diversity, with, for example, online-only publications (BrisbaneTimes, PerthNow, WAtoday) performing strongly against the monopoly newspapers in Brisbane and Perth.

Two years on, however, the perfect storm of disruption from digital media coupled with the effects of the global financial crisis, has hit circulation and readership causing a precipitous drop in the advertising revenues on which newspapers have always relied to pay their journalists. The crisis appeared to have come to a head in June 2012 when the two major news groups, Fairfax Media and News Ltd, announced major cuts to jobs, internal restructures, centralisation and, in the case of Fairfax, the closure of two printing plants.

Both companies hope that their new focus on digital delivery will provide a workable business model to support their journalism. But it is by no means clear that this will occur. Many fear that the disappearance of an adequate workforce of professional journalists will deliver a less informed public and a devalued democracy.

Background to the crisis It has been widely recognised for many years that the advertising-based revenue model for newspapers would be threatened by the spread of digital technology. As early as 1996, media analyst Peter Morris (1996) foresaw the siphoning of classified advertising revenue to Internet-based classified services and predicted online media would undermine Australia’s long-standing and highly successful newspaper business model.

In global terms the most substantial recent study of newspapers was prepared by the Working Party on the Information Economy of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD 2010). It presents a picture of dramatic decline in the newspaper industry in Europe and the United States, a less dramatic decline in some other industrialised countries and a flourishing of newspapers in developing countries such as India and China.

“Many fear that the disappearance of an adequate workforce of professional journalists will deliver a less informed public and a devalued democracy.”

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

10

Figure 1: Decline in size of newspaper market, 2007 - 2009

OECD calculations based on data of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

The OECD report points out that in sheer economic value, judged by revenue, the global newspaper publishing market (US$164b) is bigger than each of the global markets

(US$112b). The growth of this global newspaper market slowed progressively from 2004

cent). But like many calculations of averages, these figures conceal more than they reveal.

cent, one of the smallest in the world.) These are the latest international figures available, but anecdotal evidence suggests

this shrinkage has continued in most English-speaking markets and it is a pattern that is replicated across the developed world.

Australia’s newspaper publishing industry was recently valued at $4.9 billion dollars, ahead

A Snapshot of Australia’s Digital Future to 2050, classifies newspapers as an industry in “likely demise” rather than “transformational”. Industry forecaster Phil Ruthven (2012), who prepared the report for IBM, predicts newspapers will be substituted before 2050 by online publishing because, in his view, there is a “slow but inevitable demise of the printed output”.

The current economic crisis has intensified structural problems that existed for many years. These include declining circulation and advertising revenue, competition from traditional media such as TV and radio as well as new media such as the internet.

Changes in advertising revenue are due to structural changes caused by digital technology and are likely to have the most significant results. US newspaper-advertising revenues fell

-12.8 per cent in 2011 (Barclays 2012), illustrating a general downward trend which appears unlikely to be reversed. The OECD report identifies a “downward spiral of many forms of printed news” and for these reasons it argued that the “economic foundations of journalism have to be rethought”. More significantly, the report continues that “it is less obvious what online business models, partnerships and organisations will best support cost-intensive, public service-oriented news in the future” (OECD 2012).

The report states that while most newspapers still make profits, these are more likely to be around an average of 5 per cent, which is less than a quarter of what they were in the 1990s. This advertising income has fallen by nearly -48 per cent since 2006, according to the Pew Centre’s 2011 report, State of the News Media. In the past 20 years, the number of US daily

2011 report notes that employment of full-time editorial staff peaked in 2000 at 56,400 but

“The current economic crisis has intensified structural problems that have existed for many years.”

11

had since fallen -26.4 per cent by 2009. Taken together, the 2011 and 2012 reports show just how difficult market conditions have been in the US, with only some faint glimmers of hope lying in the move towards some form of partial paywall giving the prospect of increasing subscription revenue. But just what level of editorial staff this would support is unclear.

Similarly, in Australia the “perfect storm” has prompted a decline in overall print circulation, which has contributed to falling in advertising revenue (also partly a product of the financial crisis). The report of the Independent Media Inquiry found that while the overall advertising

losing market share to other media sectors – increasingly, over the past five years or more, to online competitors. In 2011, total newspaper advertising revenue in Australia fell by -8 per cent, and this was -18 per cent below the figure posted in 2008 (Holgate 2012).

Like in the US and UK, this has prompted cost-cutting measures including rationalisation of editorial and advertising sales staff.

As far back as 1995, US newspaper analyst Philip Meyer (1995) identified the dilemma facing newspaper companies in an article, “Learning to Love Lower Profits”, in the American Journalism Review. He identified the vicious circle of falling circulation, falling influence, declining revenue, cost-cutting, loss of quality, falling circulation that leads to a downward spiral in newspaper fortunes. “Under this scenario, the owners raise prices and simultaneously try to save their way to profitability with the usual techniques: cutting news hole, reducing staff, peeling back circulation in remote or low-income areas of less interest to advertisers, postponing maintenance and capital improvement, holding salaries down” (Meyer 1995). This is a picture we are seeing in Australia.

Circulation While the immediate cause of the crisis lies in the shift of advertising revenue away from newspapers to online alternatives, the circulation decline of newspapers has also been steadily accelerating.

One of the best ways to understand the overall change of newspaper circulation is to examine the sales of newspaper per head of population. Using data from the 2011 statement from the Audit Bureau of Circulation it is possible to find per capita circulation from 1992 to

cent since 2002 (Este 2012). Another set of figures shows that, by contrast with the US and Britain, Australian newspaper circulation are falling less dramatically. Between 2005 and 2009

-16 per cent in Britain (Shoebridge 2011).

Figure 2: Newspaper sales – the real picture

Source: ABC circulation data, ABS population data, MEAA analysis

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

12

Issue #3 The continuing importance of newspaper journalism Why focus on newspaper journalism? It may seem strange to direct particular attention to newspapers at a time when the print editions of some of Australia’s leading mastheads are in danger of being phased out. Here are three reasons. First, newspapers offer a unique and productive vantage point from which to analyse technological change in the news media. British journalism researchers Peter Cole and Tony Harcup (2011) argue newspapers are “driving convergence” more than any other media sector, because they are “adopting other forms of publishing – web, audio, video”. We agree.

Second, it is important to remember that newspapers still enjoy an independent status not shared by other media platforms. The 2010 OECD report notes “newspapers play a vital role in upholding transparency, democracy and freedom of expression, mainly because of their editorial independence from governmental or other bodies”. Headline-grabbing stories that demonstrate newspapers’ capacity to deter corruption and hold governments to account include the AWB oil-for-wheat scandal, the AFP’s wrongful arrest of Dr Haneef, and the ongoing Reserve Bank- Securency bribery scandal.

The third reason to focus on newspapers is that, along with the Australian Broadcasting Corporation, they employ the biggest numbers of professional journalists. There is a real risk that Australian society will lose its most talented and experienced journalists and editors as a result of the current economic crisis in newspapers. The implications of this loss need more attention.

The US Federal Communications Commission has analysed the effects of of newspaper closures on other news and information services (FCC 2011). While generally enthusiastic about the internet’s capacity to deliver greater news diversity, choice and citizen access, the FCC pointed to two “serious problems”: first, the growing shortage of “accountability” or public interest reporting, and, second, the inability of local news start-ups to find viable ways of funding original content creation. The FCC found newspapers were the primary suppliers of public interest journalism to the entire US media ecosystem, so their demise affected the rest of the information food chain, as well as readers (FCC 2011).

Interestingly, the FCC found little evidence that commercial media markets – including paywall experiments – would evolve quickly enough to fill the gaps in public interest journalism. It named five prominent US new media advocates (Jeff Jarvis, Clay Shirky, Hal Varian, Esther Dyson and John Hood) who had conceded the Internet would not be able to resolve this problem. The FCC worried aloud that less press scrutiny would likely mean more corruption, more wasteful government spending, and poorer information to citizens; for the FCC, this added up to a worrying “power-shift” in favour of the powerful (FCC 2011).

In Australia, as elsewhere, there are intense and legitimate debates about newspaper performance, media power, and the accountability of journalists. Questions about who watches the watchdogs are becoming more insistent. Newspaper historian Michael Schudson (2008) says democracies need an unlovable press. Fascination and dislike go hand in hand, according to Peter Cole and Tony Harcup (2011). They say, “there is no correlation between the popularity of newspapers and the extent to which they are criticised and abused. It is the ultimate love-hate relationship”.

Falling revenue While Australian newspapers widely expected a small revival in 2011, the actual results saw the revenue situation worsening. In the first half of 2011 total print advertising was $1648

share of the overall advertising market by -2.2 per cent (Finkelstein 2012). By contrast TV

internet advertising grew by $191 million (18 per cent) and one estimate saw an overall print downturn of between -2 and -4 per cent (Finkelstein 2012). In the first seven months of 2011 the newspaper ad market shrank -6.6 per cent according to the media information company SMI (Shoebridge 2011). Comparing the month of February 2012 to the previous February, there was a drop of -18 per cent in advertising revenue across all metropolitan newspapers (The Australian, 2012).

The industry observer Goldman Sachs sees a continuing drift of advertising away from traditional media such as print. This will be driven by the “relentless march of technology” and the rise of social media and fragmentation, it says (Goldman Sachs 2012). Of technological change, the report notes: “Over the past 10 years, the growth in online has been nothing short of phenomenal. Online advertising has grown from virtually zero in 2000 to c.21 per cent of the total ad market in 2011 as a result of the share gains in online display, online classifieds, and search.” The next stage of this will see a major increase in advertising going to social and online media. In stark contrast to this growth is the performance of print publications which in 1996 captured 56 per cent of advertising, this quantum falling to

13

Declining share price Despite efforts made by the management of newspaper companies to restructure their operations to reflect the changing nature of the news business, the gloomy outlook for the sector is reflected in poor performance on the stock exchange.

fortunes of the company have steadily declined. In June 2012 the company’s share price hit new

about -90 per cent since the merger. Fairfax’s competitors have hardly fared better. In the past five years, APN’s shares have fallen

the overall strong position of the global entertainment business.

Declining editorial staff numbers The Media, Entertainment & Arts Alliance (the trade union that represents journalists in Australia) has estimated that overall the industry has lost more than 1,000 full-time journalists’ jobs in the past three years. With the projected job losses at Fairfax and News, this would bring the decline in the number of journalists to well over 1,500. The Independent Media Inquiry Report (Finkelstein 2012) emphasised the potential impact of this cost-cutting strategy thus: “the Inquiry is of the view that some caution needs to be exercised about the ability of newspapers to maintain a substantial commitment of resources to investigative and public interest journalism.”

What we know about the business of digital journalism There is evidence that, for some newspapers at least, digital news delivery is beginning at least to pay for itself. The Guardian, in April 2012, reported claims by the Daily Mail and General Trust that its flagship website, dailymail.co.uk would generate digital revenue of £25 million in 2011/2012 and break even (Sweney 2012). However the company did not reveal how much of the costs of generating the vast amounts of online content are being borne by the print newspaper.

Diversified business models are increasingly being adopted because it is generally agreed that digital advertising revenues will not, in the foreseeable future, replace income lost by falling print advertising revenue. The Pew Foundation’s 2012 State of the US News Media report found that an increasing number of newspapers are moving to join those that already offer some kind of digital subscription. This partly responds to the success of the New York Time’s “metered model”, which

to the fact that many newspapers have lost their “normal” advertising income. Giving evidence to the UK’s Leveson Inquiry in July 2012, analyst Claire Enders said even

the most successful newspaper websites had not found the “magic bullet” that enabled them to make enough digital dollars to pay for their journalism. The Mail Online, which is the world’s most popular news website with more than 90 million unique browsers per month, made £16 million in 2011 while The Daily Mail, its print counterpart, made more than £608 million.

Meanwhile The Guardian in digital advertising (the lion’s share of the revenue being transactional). This, said Enders, was a 10th of what the Guardian group newspapers made from their print editions.

The Pew Research Centre Report on digital journalism (Rosentiel 2012) found that for every

Interviews were conducted with a “high degree of candour” the report said. The same level of candour is not in evidence in Australia, where newspaper publishers

minimised their problems when they gave evidence to the Finkelstein inquiry into the media in 2011. Publishers’ representatives rejected in principle any form of market intervention to assist their industry. The inquiry took them at their word and noted that the publishers “confidently presented a positive assessment of their future prospects”. The inquiry’s report saw no reason to take action immediately, but said the question of government assistance to newspapers ought to be the subject of a future reference to the Productivity Commission (Finkelstein 2012). Any inquiry should not be limited to an analysis of the industry, it said, but should also take account of the principle of media independence and the prevention of partiality or censorship.

Witnesses to the Finkelstein Inquiry, including the Media Alliance, strongly urged future governments to consider a range of policy options, many of which have also been canvassed in comparable newspaper markets in OECD countries as detailed in the OECD report already cited. These included support for local news organisations outside the capital cities such as community radio stations; strengthening the news capacity of the ABC; supporting tax incentives for private or philanthropic investment in news; specific subsidies to foster investigative journalism; and the creation of a centre to sponsor the professional development of journalists.

“Digital advertising revenue will not, in the foreseeable future, replace income lost to falling print advertising revenue.”

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

14

Issue #4 Meeting the crisis? The differing structures of Australia’s two largest newspaper publishers, Fairfax Media and News Limited, will affect their ability to meet the crisis. Fairfax is an Australian-based company and relies largely on revenues from its local businesses, meaning it is more vulnerable to local market pressures. On the other hand, News Limited’s membership of a large global “family” may afford it some degree of protection, although the recent announcement that News Corporation will split into two separate companies, with TV and films in one and publishing in another may affect this (we have yet to see how the split will affect Australian assets).

But both companies have adopted cost cutting as their immediate response. Fairfax

will be journalists’ jobs), as well as closing print operations. News Limited has been more secretive but its own newspapers speculate that between 1,000 and 1,500 jobs will go, with 400 to 500 coming from the editorial side.

Over the past few years, both companies have steadily reduced their editorial staff. Fairfax has reduced the number of editorial staff by an estimated 50 per cent, the bulk of which has been in sub-editing and other production roles as well. Sub-editing duties have been outsourced to Pagemasters, a company owned by AAP, which is itself owned by a consortium of publishers including Fairfax and News Ltd. News Limited has quietly reduced staff numbers across the board, partly through redundancy and partly through natural attrition. The company has centralised the sub-editing and production of its mastheads, establishing so-called “sub-hubs” on a state-by-state basis, a move that has been criticised as it devalues specialist and local knowledge.

In both companies there has also been increased syndication of copy across group mastheads. The latest plans also include the introduction of centralised “story-based” commissioning of news to publish across its papers, websites and mobile devices such as tablets and smartphones.

The key strategy both companies will adopt in order to monetise their content is a move to a user-pays business model which will rely on a paywall around their news sites to which readers will pay a subscription to access via websites, smartphones and tablets. Both companies appear to be adopting a “soft” paywall, which will be monetised by selling those “engaged readers” (ie: those people willing to pay for content) to advertisers. This strategy represents a major reversal for Fairfax Media.

The problem for all the major newspaper groups, in Australia and elsewhere, is that the growth of new digital readers needs to be huge to outweigh the continual loss of print readers. Even newspaper publishers estimate that if print readers are worth $1 per head to publishers, digital readers are worth 10 cents or less (NPA 2011). But a huge growth in digital readers does not appear to be happening.

Print sector failure a problem for democracy One of the ongoing problems for journalists and readers of newspapers in Australia is that newspaper publishers see their industry’s problems as purely commercial issues that affect no one else. Yet the industry’s problems have ramifications far wider than the industry. Newspapers (or rather the journalistic function of their professional staff) play an important role in society and in the democratic system. The publishers themselves regularly acknowledge this when they promote the “watchdog” role of newspapers as a form of accountability for governments. But when their commercial ability to fund this watchdog role is impaired the publishers do not acknowledge that this has social and political consequences, and that the wider public has a legitimate interest in the fate of journalism and the news media in which it operates. Given the problems of the economic viability of newspapers in recent times, such issues can only become more pressing.

In summary, the outlook is uncertain. Industry analyses of the newspaper crisis in Australia and abroad have captured the major pressures threatening the economic viability of newspapers, but leave us with more questions than answers about the prospects of digital technologies either enhancing news quality or sustaining print-based journalism into the future. In the sections that follow, we take a much closer look at the ways newspaper journalists are making the transition from print-based to digital newsrooms and what they have to say about its impact on news quality. This is the most systematic and in- depth account of change in Australian newspaper journalism undertaken to date.

15

THE TRANSITION FROM PRINT TO MULTIMEDIA JOURNALISM

Can newspaper journalism adapt to the digital age? That’s the question driving this section of the report. It represents a systematic effort to examine the changing nature of newspaper journalism at a critical time. The interview data discussed here was gathered and analysed before Fairfax Media and News Limited announced major

company restructures in June 2012, changes that will no doubt alter the picture of industry that emerges here.

Nonetheless, the accelerating pace of change in newspapers has been evident for the past three years and our study captures an important moment in the industry’s transition from print to multimedia news delivery.

Technology and change in journalism Newspapers in Australia have been adapting to digital technologies for the past two decades, and past research tells us that this change process has stirred fear and uncertainty amongst journalists as well as excitement about the future.

Internet researcher An Nguyen (2008) argues online news in Australia has developed in two stages: the take-off years from 1995-1996, when news media rushed to establish an online presence, and a second, “fear-driven” developmental stage from 2005-2006, prompted by the take-off of wireless technologies and the upsurge in user-generated news, principally blogging. In the second stage, the metro dailies started adding original content, filing stories online before print, and building communities for their online versions.

Suellen Tapsall (2001) studied the pressures affecting journalists’ working lives in the late 1990s, and found evidence journalists were increasingly desk-bound and producing “space-filling news”. The internet was seen as an “invaluable” journalistic tool, but added to already over- stretched workloads. Optimistic views of digital technologies anticipated better news coverage, diversity and access, while the pessimists worried about loss of journalistic craft and standards, for example, from the recycling of print content in online sites. Tapsall concluded journalists were feeling somewhat powerless to maintain news quality in the face of technological change and media commercialisation.

The Media Alliance’s Future of Journalism project (2008, 2010) attempted to gauge the newsgathering and reporting opportunities opened up by digital technologies, while at the same time analysing the threats posed to journalists’ jobs and skills by the changing business of news, particularly in newspapers. This research showed media companies across Australia, and overseas, cutting back on newsroom resources as they struggled to adapt – financially, structurally or culturally – to a digital world, with consequent low staff morale. It also reported efforts to renew Australian journalism by investigating new storytelling and reader engagement techniques, as well as ideas about what audiences want from news.

Snapshots of a crisis: Media Alliance Life in the Clickstream reports identified the perfect storm affecting the news media

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

16

Reinventing journalism is an increasingly strong research theme. Margaret Simons (2011) targets three priorities: conversation, interactivity, and enabling the audience. “The core of the job – finding things out and communicating them clearly – remains”, she says, “Accuracy and integrity remain, and credibility remains. But there are new things as well” (Simons 2011). She argues journalists must collaborate with audiences to improve news reporting, extend journalistic capacity, and save journalism – a vital resource for a functioning democracy, an empowered population and community connectedness.

The four themes that emerge here are first, the redefinition of daily journalism in the converged newsroom; second, the connection between reconfiguration of revenue streams and newsroom structures; third, the challenges of change management and, fourth, the importance of innovation in journalism practice. Each of these themes is now examined in further detail, drawing on insights gained from talking to newspaper journalists across Australia.

As part of the research for this report, the authors conducted face-to-face interviews with 100 senior journalists and editorial executives at newspapers in eight different cities around Australia between September and November 2010. The interviews combined close-ended with open-ended questions. The data from the close-ended questions was quantified; the interviews were transcribed and thematically analysed using NVivo, a quantitative software tool. We provide results in two forms: statistical data that shows trends in the sample’s responses, and qualitative comments that add meaning to the statistics, and enable the voices of newspaper journalists to be heard.

Journalists from all 12 national and metro daily newspapers participated (The Advertiser, The Age, The Australian, Australian Financial Review, The Canberra Times, The Courier-Mail, The Daily Telegraph, Herald Sun, The Mercury, NT News, The Sydney Morning Herald, and The West Australian). We asked them to speak as members of the profession, rather than employees of their company. Where random sampling provides data that is representative of all groups in a target population, the research-driven or convenience sampling adopted in this project is used to gather data on a specific group of people (newspaper journalists) for the purposes of gauging what they think (see Forde 2005 for similar approach). Our results therefore reflect the views of the sample; to claim that they reflect the views of all Australian journalists more generally would be a misrepresentation of the data.

different sets of questions to build an accurate picture of what the transition from print to multimedia delivery means for newsrooms. We asked journalists and editorial executives how they spend their working days. We also asked them about newsroom business models and structures. We specifically asked the editorial executives about the priorities and challenges of change management while the journalists were asked about the new tools and techniques of journalism practice, including training and/or job reclassifications.

Redefining daily journalism There is no doubt that the production of news is being redefined, forcing life-long print journalists to master new skills, develop more flexible and agile work practices, and adapt to the demands of Web and mobile devices.

veterans of the craft, having worked in the industry for two decades or more. Roughly half (48 per cent) of them had worked at the same newspaper for 10 or more years, while one in five

Few were looking to change occupations, despite mounting uncertainties about print delivery. One quarter (24 per cent) of respondents said they expect to work in journalism until retirement, half of them said they anticipated working 10 or more years, and only one-fifth (18 per cent) stated a lesser period.

We asked our respondents how they spent their working days. Two-thirds (69 per cent) of respondents said they spent at least part of their day online, with one in five (21 per cent)

spending more than half of the working day on the printed newspapers, including one-third

There were widespread concerns that competing demands of print and online are adversely affecting the product, with just under two-thirds (62 per cent) of the 100 respondents participating in the survey describing the current quality of Australian printed newspaper

down” of news values and “content dumping” (that is, the practice of recycling stories from the print editions to the newspaper websites).

“Optimistic views anticipated better news coverage, pessimists worried about the loss of journalistic craft and standards.”

17

Figure 3: Quality of newspaper journalism

Only (14 per cent) respondents declared their full confidence in online journalism, highlighting the advantages of immediacy and saying the news quality is excellent. Slightly

establish itself in Australia.

Figure 4: Quality of online journalism

At the same time, there was considerably more enthusiasm for news delivered on mobile

“game-changer” because it is journalist-friendly (adaptable to known news cycles, formats and values), reader-friendly (adaptable to known consumer preferences and habits) and financially viable because the content is seen to be more readily monetised.

Reconfiguring revenues streams and structures The most pressing concern identified in the interviews was the need to find a viable new

the “make-or-break” issue in the light of the rapidly falling advertising revenue from print products, which has not been replaced by digital revenue, even after the development of paid news apps for tablet and mobile devices.

While there was some talk of “re-engineering the old business model for the Internet”, and of “finding new ways to give advertisers value for money”, user-pays news was the most commonly identified new revenue earner. As one journalist put it, “Getting people to pay for online is the crux of the issue,” while another described paywalls as “the debate we have to have”. A third journalist said: “It’s readers or advertisers – the profession’s survival depends on it.”

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

18

Issue #5 Why can’t newspapers make digital dollars? Nearly all newspapers are now in the process of trying to transition from print to digital, but few are making substantial profits from their digital business. All of this was the subject of a major report by the Columbia Journalism School, The Story So Far: What We Know about the Business of Digital Journalism (Grueskin 2011). The report reviewed and analysed a large

number of independent studies into the business side of journalism. For much of the past 10 years, media businesses have concentrated

on building large audiences for their news websites, often through techniques such as “search engine optimisation” (a method of embedding popular search terms on headlines to ensure casual browsers are sent to one’s news site). Many news organisations, including Fairfax Media, rightly point out that they have huge online audiences. The website for The Sydney Morning Herald (smh.com.au) is the most popular newspaper website in Australia, yet it is clear that the advertising revenue from this site cannot replace the revenue from the print editions of the newspaper. The same is true in the US, according to The Story So Far. The New York Times has a vast online audience, but the print edition, mainly reliant on ads, still accounts for 80 per cent of The Times’ revenue.

So why is it so hard to make money from digital news? The short answer is that advertisers want more than just large

audiences, the report says. We have always known that advertisers also focused on the demographics of the audiences, not just the overall audience number, but also the “quality” of that audience. One study of the Los Angeles Times website (latimes.com) showed it had huge audiences but also that each user saw only an average of six pages in a month. A 2010 Pew Centre study quoted in the report, said that the average visitor spends only three minutes and four seconds per session on a news site. Even at top news sites, the average user visited only a few times per month. The stark difference with newspapers

newspaper while less-involved readers spend at least 15 minutes. The issue for advertisers and media businesses is the degree of

engagement of audiences. One study quoted in The Story So Far shows that for an average small-to-medium city newspaper there are four kinds of digital visitors: “fans” who visit twice a week or more, “regulars” who visit once or twice; “occassionals” who drop in two or three times a month and “fly-bys” who come once a month.

the visits. However, upon deeper analysis, it appears that “fans” are responsible for more than 55 per cent of the page views of the site. The logic of all this is that digital newspapers need to concentrate on building deeply engaged not mass audiences. In this task, the editorial side of newspapers comes into play, since “fans” are engaged by

particular kinds of content. A study of the The Dallas Morning News, cited in the Columbia University report, reveals

something else. The visits to the site (40 million page views, generated by 5 million visitors) are fairly typical. While news pages get the most traffic, the visitors’ stay is very brief and not engaged. Sports pages get more engaged readers. One particular sports site, High School GameTime, gets much more engagement. It covers the activities and the players at 200 high schools in the Dallas-Fort Worth area. Its visitors were five times more engaged than those coming to the news section of the paper. The Dallas Morning News has been able to boost revenue by doing a deal with a cable TV channel and selling a mobile app to many fans. The key to such success, the site’s editor said, is to focus on something which readers care about deeply and which no other news provider does as well. This could well be the motto for all attempts to monetise aspects of news.

Quality at a price: New York’s revered “Grey Lady” has introduced a metered paywall to enable it to charge for some content.

19

Three hurdles to making the shift to user-pays online news emerged: first, company reluctance to take “bold action” on user-pays online news while the print editions are still making money (although this changed in June 2012 when Fairfax announced it was taking all its newspapers behind paywalls); second, reader resistance to paying for what is now freely available, and, third, concerns about producing news worth paying for without additional staff/resources. Technology offered answers for some, with tablet subscriptions seen as the most consumer-friendly method of user-pays news. For others, the shift to user-pays means journalists will have to prove their relevance in the digital age, or as one journalist said, “We have to convince people that what we produce has value”.

Only 10 per cent of respondents responded to the question about a new business model by raising issues other than creating new revenue streams, such as developing more innovative forms of digital journalism, more efficient work methods or better strategies for marketing the news. For one of these respondents the top priority is getting young people interested in journalism; another spoke of the need to foster audiences. Two respondents pointed out that the business model is constantly changing and newspapers have multiple revenue sources beyond advertising. For another, all the talk of business models was “a distraction” from the core task of producing good journalism.

Newsroom structure Uncertainties about revenue express themselves most clearly in the competing and often inconsistent editorial priorities of the print and online editions of the same newspaper.

At the time of the survey, Fairfax Media’s newspapers were just moving to an integrated editorial structure whereas The West Australian and most of the News Limited mastheads had already done so.

For a quarter (25 per cent) of respondents, separate editorial control of the website and the newspaper was confusing, counterproductive or undermined the brand, while for another quarter (26 per cent), the mechanics of editorial integration across the digital, print and mobile platforms were still in the process of being worked out, with different degrees of success in restructuring work flows and responsibilities, convincing journalists to re-version stories, or achieving product consistency across all platforms.

Figure 5: Who controls the website?

Adelaide-first The Advertiser offers the most interesting example of a converging newsroom. Fifteen years ago, Peter Morris (1996), an Australian technology writer for the West Australian, predicted that News Limited would outpace Fairfax and drive the transition to multiplatform newsrooms, as it had the most to gain from digital news delivery systems. What Morris didn’t foresee was that News Limited’s newsroom revolution would get underway not in the major media markets of Melbourne or Sydney but in the one-newspaper town of Adelaide, where Rupert Murdoch got his start as a proprietor.

For the past three years, the Advertiser has been moving to a broadcast newsroom model, flattening out news management, abolishing the roles of chief-of-staff and section editors, and creating new thematic editorial teams that deliver content to four platforms: the newspaper, website, iPad edition and email newsletter. The newsroom looks almost the same as before except that the conference desk has moved to the centre of the newsroom, next to a high-tech interactive whiteboard used to monitor the status of the days’ big stories.

“Tablet subscriptions were seen as the most consumer- friendly method of user-pays news.”

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

20

Figure 6: The Advertiser’s new newsroom structure

Source: Adelaide Advertiser

News Limited clearly thinks the experiment is producing excellent results: The Advertiser won the Chairman’s prize at the 2010 News Awards. The company’s then CEO, John Hartigan (2010), said The Advertiser had “overhauled decades-old work practices and changed deeply- embedded parts of editorial culture in an exceptional way”. Significantly, new workflows have meant new work practices and journalists now “have much more responsibility for how their story progresses throughout its lifecycle on each different platform” (MediaPlanet 2011). Inevitably, this means more time spent on the job and a faster pace of work. Another concern is whether stories produced by the same journalist working across the four platforms make the best use of each medium, or tend to uniformity. More importantly, whether readers notice, or even care about, the changes to news content that result from such newsroom restructuring is another question altogether. The changing relationship between journalists and readers is taken up further on, in the next section this report.

Change management priorities and challenges Falling revenues from traditional sources appears to be the main driver of newsroom change,

these respondents said their main challenge was getting the job done with tighter resources and fewer staff, including keeping up with technology, implementing newsroom restructure, and meeting the demands of constant publishing. More than half (56 per cent) said it was proving difficult to change the mindset of their staff, and keep them motivated.

Figure 7: Newsrooms in transition

“I think the biggest challenge for anyone managing journalists into the future,” said one editor, “is to direct them, herd them like cats, towards an environment where they are thinking about what they will file for their website as much as what they will file for the newspaper.”

21

Another editor said, “It’s just the mind-set really…some people are a bit nervous about doing the video stuff because they say they’ve got a great head for radio and not for video, but, largely, people see it as an opportunity to do something new and different.”

Only one in five (18 per cent) of the editorial executives mentioned the importance of encouraging staff to embrace multimedia journalism. “We have to change the cultural fixation with print,” said one editor. “It’s ‘I work across platforms’ now, not ‘I work for the paper’”.

Figure 8: A new mindset for journalists

Restructuring workflows and responsibilities is the main step that editorial executives are

editorial executives talked about this as a priority. “The whole newsroom has been restructured in order to be able to respond quickly and get

material up online in a very short timeframe,” said one editor. “People start here now very early in the morning compared to when the normal newsroom would start, and the structure is more like a television station than a traditional newsroom … it’s an attempt to flatten the structure of management and make people respond and get things done more quickly.”

Just over half (56 per cent) of the editorial executives said they were taking specific

cent) identifying the need to moderate readers’ comments as a key measure, either to prevent publication of racist and inflammatory material, or, more proactively, in the words of one editor, to “raise the level of that side of the content”.

Keeping the focus on fact-checking and accuracy was another important measure. While several editorial executives insisted online news standards were the same as for print, “you just have to do it a bit quicker, that’s all”, there were numerous concerns that the speed of online publishing was itself the main problem for news quality: “I think there’s a sense that if you’re wrong online, you’re not wrong for long,” said one editor, “and I don’t think that is a good attitude.” Another editor said: “The printed copy goes past at least four pairs of eyes before it gets released; with online, it might be one.”

Getting “proper resources” was a third measure, with several editorial executives expressing concern that small teams of young, less-experienced journalists are working on the online sites when “a wider pool” is needed: “The more the traditional journalists can change and embrace and adapt to the new medium,” said one editorial executive, “the better it will be for the quality of journalism online”. Another editor said young, inexperienced digital journalists would benefit from “exposure to, mentoring from, and training by, colleagues working on the print editions” – because they are “some of the best journalists in Australia”. A third editor said: “You need training and experience, intelligence and effort.”

Interestingly, the 2012 Fairfax Media restructure directly addressed this concern, announcing a shift to a digital-first editorial model for all the mastheads, and promoting the editor of smh.com.au, Darren Goodsir, into the position of news director for The Sydney Morning Herald and deputy to the new editor-in-chief, Sean Aylmer.

In our survey, half (51 per cent) of the editorial executives admitted their staff were not receiving enough training in digital journalism, with some (20 per cent) offering ad hoc audio/video training on an as-needed basis, even fewer (10 per cent) providing social media training, and others (20 per cent), meeting digital skills shortages by hiring new staff.

“Printed copy goes past at least four pairs of eyes before it gets released – with online it might be one.”

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

22

When asked about the preferred skills and attributes of recruits, almost half (46 per cent) of the editorial executives nominated digital media skills as the top priority. Other desirable

initiative, energy and enthusiasm; courage and persistence; maturity, and curiosity. Personal qualities got more attention than qualifications, with only 21 per cent of respondents interested in new staff holding tertiary degrees.

Figure 9: What editors want

New tools and techniques of journalism practice Thirty-seven of the 61 journalists we interviewed said they were using new media tools,

some minimal type of digital journalism training, most commonly in the form of an introduction to the in-house content management system (CMS).

There were few vigorous complaints about use of these tools, or the broader shift to

their use meant additional duties or job reclassification. For the most part, journalists were more frustrated by expectations that they would produce more stories, reversioned for various platforms, without any proper training.

training program as an alternative means of upgrading skills. There was a wide range of views about the most urgent training needs.

One priority is learning how to adapt traditional professional skills to meet the demands of digital platforms. Journalists want to know more about how media law and journalistic ethics relate to news content published online (particularly in relation to moderating readers’ comments and other types of user-generated content) as well as digital story- telling techniques or, as one journalist said, “understanding how a news story from the paper can be told online”. Interestingly, several journalists called for training in how to “make difficult judgments under pressure”, “integrate social media with print” and identify “what people want”.

“I don’t know if we’re serving the people, or giving people what they want,” said one journalist. “It just goes into the ether … you can get some statistics about click-through on stories, but according to those people are only interested in lesbian vampire killers – and I’m not sure that’s a true reflection of what people want … although we do manage to link ‘lesbian’ and ‘vampire’ and ‘killer’ to many stories.”

A second group of respondents wants to learn audio and video skills – how to record interviews and present pieces to camera – in order to produce multimedia packages for publication on different platforms. As one journalist said, “high production values are important” in digital media, and journalists run the risk of becoming “prolific producers of fairly low-quality content” unless they get proper equipment and training. A third group of journalists is eager to “get the most out of digital media” by learning either new content techniques – social media, blogging and data-mining – or new technical skills, such as interactive graphics, tablet applications, RSS feeds or hyperlinks and even ways to self-promote and attract followers/friends.

23

Issue #6 Digital-first journalism We know what newspaper journalism looks like. What will journalism in purely digital publications look like?

Some observers are worried that editorial decisions – what to publish? what angle to take? —will be dependent on commercial criteria determined largely by analysis of hits and impressions. Professional news judgment will play no role. These fears were fuelled by the leaking last year of an internal document from AOL, the giant internet company, spelling out guidelines for its editors. Significantly, the leak occurred just before AOL bought the The Huffington Post, one of the most successful online publications (it expected to make $10m in 2011).

still available on the Business Insider website. The presentation decreed an integration of advertising and editorial staff. As well, it urged editors to decide what to publish based on four consideration: the traffic potential, revenue potential, edit quality, and turnaround time, according to Business Insider. Page 28 of the presentation specified that the “content creators” should be “mindful of the bottom line”. For example, an article for which a freelancer is paid $50 must be highly likely to bring in at least $100 in revenue, judged by “page views” and “cost per thousand” page impressions.

The Colombia Journalism School report on the business of digital journalism, The Story So Far, gives an example of an article for which a freelancer is paid $100 and which therefore needs $200 in ad revenue. The story must be guaranteed to generate around 22,222 page impressions. The report also points out that at cnnmoney.com, all staff have access to page-view and traffic data. The staff gets daily emails listing the top 50 stories by section.

All of this has consequences. When it became possible to analyse TV ratings minute-by- minute, it became obvious that when a current affairs show interviewed a politician there was a sudden drop in the number of viewers. Now it has become possible through data analytics to do a similar analysis of stories for digital news media.

There is a further complication. The new saviour of newspapers and digital news sites is widely seen to be paywalls. Readers who pay a subscription can avoid the paywalls to get access to articles. But the content behind the paywalls is also scrutinised using these data analytics. So if a reader subscribed to The Sydney Morning Herald, assuming this meant delivery of a certain kind of content, they could find that the content changed rapidly and went down market, much the same as the way in which the content of the Herald websites differs markedly from that of the printed newspaper.

C ar

to on

b y

A nd

re w

W el

do n

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

24

The wide range of responses presented here, across all four themes, indicate some journalists are thriving on change, on the faster pace, rolling deadlines and opportunities to break more stories: “My focus is on news breaking,” said one reporter, “It’s all very well to pull out one story once a month from some investigative unit, but someone has to ‘feed the beast’ and I respect that type of work as well”.

Others are struggling to adapt to expectations about re-skilling, to reconfigured news agendas and standards and to the relentless new imperatives of speed, immediacy and instant reader appeal.

“The story gets forgotten in the search to dress it up,” said one reporter, “We need substance, not just enthusiasm for technology, it’s the story that should be the foremost consideration.” Another reporter said, “We publish a lot more now without thinking about whether it is good or not.” A more senior colleague worried aloud about the political implications of the rush to get stories up online: “It’s bad for public debate,” he said, “there’s a tendency for misinformation to gather its own pace and be taken as fact when it’s not. The immigration debate is a good example.”

The old rules of the news game are gone. Only a decade ago, journalism was a stable, medium-sized occupation; news production followed well-established routines and conventions, and the internet looked like offering interesting new possibilities for news production and delivery. Now, unstable revenues and job cuts mean fewer reporters, reconfigured workflows, centralisation and outsourcing of subbing and other elements of news production, and increased workloads and responsibilities. The pace of daily journalism is faster. There are many more readers, with many more information demands. And the tasks of newsgathering and storytelling are getting more complicated as journalists are expected to enrich the reader’s experience by adding audio, video, photos or other types of visual data to text-based stories.

Issue #7 Not just another business Many journalists both in Australia and overseas have made the point that journalism is more than simply a money-making business; it has both a democratic function as well as a commercial function. Nearly all journalists (including those interviewed in the survey for this report) speak in terms of journalism’s role as a mechanism for accountability and a means to scrutinise the powerful.

Principles such as these are embodied in the structure and history of many major news organisations around the world. When Rupert Murdoch bought The Times and The Sunday Times, a parliamentary Act stipulated that this group of newspapers had to be run by an independent board. Similarly when Murdoch bought Dow Jones & Company (which includes the The Wall Street Journal), an independent committee concerned with the appointment of editors was part of the deal. Editors sometimes insist on clauses in their contract specifying independence and non-interference on editorial matters. As well as this, governments of all stripes have often treated the purchase of news media differently from simple commercial transactions. There have been restrictions on the concentration of media ownership and on foreign ownership. As this report is being compiled the federal government is debating whether to require that any major change of media ownership pass a test that it is “in the public interest”.

More recently, principles of editorial independence from the commercial and political pressures have been the focus of a conflict around the ownership of Fairfax Media. This began when the mining boss, Gina Rinehart, purchased a significant holding in Fairfax Media. It soon became clear that one of the motivations for the purchase was to influence the editorial side of the company’s newspapers. Questioned about her move by ABC TV’s Four Corners, Ms Rinehart said she was “concerned by the lack of understanding in the media” on the issue of climate change. Sceptical points of view should be published, she said, “not just the views of climate extremists”. Climate change was “not due to mankind at all”, she said. Some associate her desire for influence with earlier calls from leading British sceptic, Christopher Monckton, (invited in by Rinehart to Australia in 2011 to give a lecture in honour of her father Lang Hancock) that the “super rich” should purchase mainstream media to influence public debate.

The existing board members of Fairfax Media have resisted Rinehart’s call for two or more seats and have insisted that she publicly agree to the Fairfax charter of editorial independence, which limits the right of board members to directly influence editorial

“It’s all very well to pull out one story a month from some investigative unit, but someone has to ‘feed the beast’.”

25

processes and content. Ms Rinehart has refused to do so and, as noted, has sold down her interest to 15 per cent of the company.

The current charter of editorial independence was adopted in 1992 as part of the public listing of Fairfax.

Fairfax Media’s CEO, Greg Hywood, recently described the charter as the “rock on which we base this organisation”. The charter was “part of the culture of the place”, he said. It meant that the board had the right to appoint editors but that it was the CEO’s responsibility to select and interview the candidates. The charter, he said, prevents “individual board members from going to individual journalists and telling them what they should or should not write”. It was both a promise to readers that they get fair- minded representation, and a “promise to advertisers: that they would be treated fairly”.

To test claims that Australian journalists have been slow to embrace digital tools except as a way to promote and distribute their work, we polled Walkley-winners for 2010 and 2011, asking about their use of these tools in researching and producing their stories.

Around a quarter said they had used social media tools to research their subjects; the most popular means being through blogs and message boards (28 per cent); followed by

Respondents who used social media commented that the volume of people now using such tools – and the information they are willing to share make them good tools for finding sources and discovering social trends. Online message boards and chatrooms, as well as blogs, were also seen as good places for locating sources: “Social media allows you to cut through the red tape and speak directly to people,” said one respondent.

Another prize-winner, while enthusiastic about the use of such tools to find sources, especially for international stories, social media “ought not to replace direct verbal or written contact between journalists and sources”.

Another respondent observed that certain blogs, by high-profile professionals and business people, provided authoritative insights – the key thing being the authority of the source.

Access to photos was also cited by several respondents as important plus point for using tools such as Facebook.

However some respondents also raised ethical concerns such as invasion of privacy, while others cited the difficulty of verifying information and identity of bloggers – one instance cited was the “Gay Girl in Damascus” blog, which claimed to document the life of 25-year-old Amina Abdallah Arraf al-Omari, a half-Syrian, half-American lesbian living in Damascus and turned out to be written by a middle-aged American man living in Scotland.

“I would generally only use it as a search and messaging tool, not necessarily a source

C ar

to on

b y

R on

T an

db er

g

JOURNALISM AT THE SPEED OF BYTES Australian newspapers in the 21ST century

26

of unquestionable facts,” seems to sum up the attitude of those people who said they used social media tools in their work.

As for multimedia presentation, few respondents said they or their organisation had fully exploited the possibilities that their stories offered. Most said their stories – whether they were print or broadcast (TV and radio) – had been available online, but very few

accompanied by a slideshow of images and the same number said their stories had employed interactive graphics.

Several respondents said their work might have been enhanced if it had been accompanied by original documents and extra features such as (as one print respondent suggested) video interviews.

“I think it’s great that you can feature extra interviews, longer cuts and supporting materials online to allow audiences to engage with a story more thoroughly,” said one respondent, cautioning that as many people would be accessing this material on a small screen, it would have to be carefully designed. “If someone likes your story they’re generally keen to see/learn more.”

The main drawbacks were seen as a lack of time and resources as well as insufficient training for reporters to be able to attempt some of these enhancements themselves.

When it came to distribution and promotion, 50 per cent of respondents said their work had been promoted by social media – the majority by Facebook and Twitter.

When asked whether the use of new media tools should be regarded as an important journalistic skill, most respondents were cautious, and stressed that, as one put it: “the quality of the story is more important than the technology used to deliver it”. This message recurred, in different ways, time and time again. “I think high-quality journalism is almost immediately recognisable through its sheer impact and importance,” wrote another.

However others saw the use of social media for sourcing and distributing stories, and multi-media tools for the production and presentation of issues as “vital journalistic skills”.

“In terms of presenting, I think multimedia is more than just a skill, but something every journalist simply has to master,” wrote one respondent.” Thinking about the presentation of your story as a multimedia package from the outset is not an optional extra anymore. These skills greatly enhance newsgathering, quality and presentation and I believe they should be recognised with prizes.”

The question of whether use of new media tools and technology should be specifically recognised by industry awards divided people. Those who had used such tools the fullest naturally felt that they should be recognised, while the majority did not see the need.

The consensus was that the quality of the journalism should always be the central criterion for awarding prizes, while the presentation (or “bells and whistles” as one respondent put it) should always be a secondary concern.

One respondent summed it up thus: “The journalistic skills are not really changed. For me, new media provides extra outlets for distribution but doesn’t change the basic journalistic skill set. High-quality journalism is about research, tracking down people to talk, analytical skills and the ability to communicate clearly – most of which are unaffected by the medium (new or otherwise).”

We will return to the important issue of digital journalism and news quality and standards later in this report, after first turning our attention to the changed relationship between journalists and readers.

43

References The Future of Journalism in the Advanced Democracies, Aldershot, UK: Ashgate

Publishing. Australian, 2012, Fairfax leads market drop, 16 February. Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA), 2011, Enduring Concepts: Communications and Media in

Australia

Beam, R. and Meeks, L. 2011, So many stories, so little time: Economics, technology, and the changing professional environment for news work, in W. Lowrey and P. J Gade, (Eds.), Changing the News: The Forces Shaping Journalism in Uncertain Times, New York: Routledge

Deuze, M. 2008, Understanding journalism as newswork: How it changes, and how it remains the same, Westminster Papers in Communication and Culture

Deuze, M. 2002, National news cultures: a comparison of Dutch, German, British, Australian and U.S. journalists, Journalism and Mass Communication Quarterly

Este, Jonathan 2012, Figures and graphs for this report, Sydney: Walkley Foundation. Federal Communications Commission USA 2011, Information Needs of Communities, Available 20 July 2012 from

Finkelstein, Hon. R. and Ricketson, M. 2012, Report of the Independent Inquiry into the Media and Media

Forde, S. 2005, The changing face of the Australian newsroom: Cultural and ethnic diversity among Sydney journalists, Australian Journalism Review

Garden, M. 2010, Are predictions of newspapers’ impending demise exaggerated?, Asia Pacific Media Educator, no.

Grueskin, B. Seave, A. and Graves, L. 2011, The Story So Far: What We Know About the Business of Digital Journalism, New York: Columbia Journalism School.

Hanusch, F. 2008, Mapping Australian journalism culture: results from a survey of journalists’ role perceptions, Australian Journalism Review,

Harding-Smith, R. 2012, Media Ownership and Regulation in Australia, Centre for Policy Development, Available

Henningham, J. 1998, Australian journalists, in D. Weaver (Ed.), The Global Journalist: News People Around the World, Cresskill, N.J.: Hampton Press.

Henningham, J. and Delano, A. 1998, British journalists, in D. Weaver (Ed.), The Global Journalist: News People Around the World, Cresskill, N.J.: Hampton Press.

Holgate, B. 2012, Newspapers at a crossroads, Australian Financial Review Josephi, Beate 2011, Supporting democracy: How well do the Australian media perform? Nathan, Qld.; Griffith Centre

for Cultural Research, Griffith University. Media, Entertainment and Arts Alliance 2010, Life in the Clickstream II — The future of journalism, Media Alliance:

Redfern. Media, Entertainment and Arts Alliance 2008, Life in the Clickstream — The future of journalism, Media Alliance:

Redfern. MediaPlanet, 2011, How The Advertiser revolutionised the newsroom, 25 February, Available 2 July 2012 from

Meyer, P. 1995, Learning to love lower profits, American Journalism Review, December

Morris, P. 1996, Newspapers and the new information media, Media International Australia Nguyen, A. 2008, Facing the ‘fabulous monster’: The traditional media’s fear-driven innovation culture in the

development of online news, Journalism Studies, 9(1), 91-104. Newspaper Publishers’ Association (NPA) 2011, Submission to the Independent Media Inquiry, Available 20 June

OECD, 2010, News in the Internet Age: New Trends in News Publishing, OECD Publishing, Available 15 October 2011

O’Donnell, P. 2009, That’s Gold! Thinking about excellence in Australian journalism, Australian Journalism Review,

Pew Research Centre’s Project for Excellence in Journalism, 2011, The State of the News Media, Available 2 June

Pew Research Centre’s Project for Excellence in Journalism, 2012, State of the News Media

Ricketson, M. 2012, Australian Journalism Today, South Yarra: Palgrave Macmillan. Rosenstiel, T., Jurkowitz, M and Ji, H. 2012, How newspapers are faring trying to build digital revenue, Project for

Ruthven, P. 2012, A Snapshot of Australia’s Digital Future to 2050

Schudson, M. 2008, Why Democracies Need an Unlovable Press, Malden: Polity Press. Schultz, J. 1998, Reviving the Fourth Estate, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Shoebridge, N. 2011, Newspapers aim to tell it straight, Australian Financial Review, 22 August. Simons, Margaret 2011, Journalism at the Crossroads: Crisis and Opportunity for the Press, e-Book, Scribe Publications. Singer, Jane B. 2011, Journalism and digital technologies”, in W. Lowrey and P. J Gade, (Eds.). Changing the News:

The Forces Shaping Journalism in Uncertain Times, New York: Routledge Sweney, M. 2012, Mail Online editor says site will break even this year, The Guardian, April 20. Tapsall, S. 2001, Technological talespinning: The media is the message, in S. Tapsall and C. Varley (Eds.),

Journalism: Theory in Practice, South Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Tiffen, R. 2010, The press, in S. Cunningham and G Turner (Eds.), Media and Communications in Australia rd

edition, Crows Nest: Allen & Unwin. Weaver, D. (Ed.), 1998, The Global Journalist: News People Around the World, Cresskill, N.J.: Hampton Press.

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Changing Business of News.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Current Trends in Advertising - Abstract ONLY.pdf

Chapter 4

Current trends in advertising, media and society

Before the widespread take up of the internet, and social media in particular, a chapter on current trends in advertising, media and society would have con- centrated on the ideological messages in advertisements – notably TVCs, glossy magazine ads and billboards – and their presumed social impact. As outlined in Chapter 1, such advertising was seen as a ‘sign of the times’, and semiotic analysis, that is, treating advertising as a system of signs, was believed to be the means by which the functioning of the society behind that system could be revealed (Cronin 2004b: 354). Such analysis rested on what branding academic Douglas Holt calls a ‘cultural authority’ theoretical model in which ‘Omnipotent corporations use sophisticated marketing techniques to seduce consumers to participate in a system of commodified meanings embedded in brands’ (2002: 71).

Studies of this kind can still be found in the global era (Goldman and Papson 2011), but critics of advertising are now less likely to see it as a coded force for ideological conformity, shoring up and reproducing a class-based social structure, but rather, as ‘a medium for the reflexive construction of identity’, to quote Adam Arvidsson, one of the leading contemporary theorists (2003: 5). At least in the developed world, the trend in advertising towards marketing and branding, as distinct from simple selling, together with the emergence of more streetwise and self-expressive consumers with access to social media, has produced ‘a distinctively postmodern mode of sociality in which consumers claim to be doing their own thing while doing it with thousands of like-minded others’ (Holt 2002: 83).

While the transition to this postmodern ‘commercial culture’ should not be seen as ‘epochal’, in the sense of it being universal and total (Nixon 2003: 16), the concept of a postmodern era of consumption is useful to characterise the principal features of how advertising and consumers relate to each other in the internet age. There are at least two processes now occurring, though in a manner that Scott Lash and John Urry could not have anticipated in their landmark but controversial Economies of Signs and Space, cited in Chapter 1. First, now enabled by the interactive capabilities and multiple, lateral choices offered by the internet, there is what they call ‘an accelerating individualisation

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Current Trends in Advertising - Abstract ONLY.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Digital Media - The Network as a Method for Organizing the World.pdf

University of Minnesota Press

Chapter Title: THE NETWORK AS METHOD FOR ORGANIZING THE WORLD

Book Title: Off the Network Book Subtitle: Disrupting the Digital World Book Author(s): ULISES ALI MEJIAS Published by: University of Minnesota Press. (2013) Stable URL: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt3fh6jh.5

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide range of content in a trusted

digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about

JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

http://about.jstor.org/terms

University of Minnesota Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Off the Network

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

I T H I N K I N G T H E N E T W O R K

If there is no longer a place that can be recognized as outside, we must be against in every place.

michael hardt and antonio negri, empire

How is an ethical and political act possible when there is no outside?

bülent diken and carsten bagge laustsen, “enjoy your fight!: ‘fight club’ as a symptom of the network society”

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

This page intentionally left blank

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

. 3

1 T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

F O R O R G A N I Z I N G T H E W O R L D

t h i s b o o k i n v e s t i g a t e s how the digital network forms part of

a capitalist order that reproduces inequality through participation and

how this participation exhibits a hegemonic and consensual nature. It

describes the emergence of a network episteme that organizes knowledge

according to reductionist logic and exposes the limits of trying to counter

this logic on its own terms. Additionally, it explores the motivations and

strategies for “unmapping the network,” a process of generating differ-

ence and disidentifi cation. While these themes are considered in detail in

subsequent chapters, here I will attempt to establish a general framework

for their discussion.

The digital network is a particularly delusive technological determinant

because it is a mechanism for disenfranchisement through involvement

and for increasing voluntary social participation while simultaneously

maintaining or deepening inequalities. In other words, while the digital

network increases the means of participation in society— as celebrated in

much of the current literature— it also increases socioeconomic inequal-

ity in ways that we have not yet fully begun to understand. Networks are

designed to attract participation, but the more we participate in them,

the more inequality and disparity they produce. The way in which they

do so— the way in which they create inequality while increasing partici-

pation— is through strategies that include the commodifi cation of social

labor (bringing activities we used to perform outside the market into the

market), the privatization of social spaces (eradicating public spaces and

replacing them with “enhanced” private spaces), and the surveillance of

dissenters (through new methods of data mining and monitoring). Vari-

ous examples of these dynamics will be discussed throughout the book.

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

4 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

This is not to say that participation in digital networks fails to yield any

benefi ts, for it does produce many gains for participants. For instance,

participation may increase social capital, such as rank within a commu-

nity, or attention capital,1 such as the number of times one’s profi le in a

social networking site is viewed— all of which explains why some nodes

have managed to “make it big” with very few resources in what appears

to be a level playing fi eld. But my point is that these methods of captur-

ing and measuring new kinds of social wealth are means of concealing

the fact that participation in the network promotes, overall, a kind of

inequality that can eventually nullify most of its benefi ts.

Inequality is, in fact, part of the natural order of networks, particularly

those exhibiting a preferential attachment process. The outcome of this

process— whether we are talking about networks of proteins, citations,

or web links— is that the rich nodes in those networks tend to get richer.

This is not something that should strike us as illogical or irrational, since

we know that even (or especially) in the midst of great disparity, those

with resources manage to increase their wealth at the expense of those

with fewer resources (which explains why it was recently reported that

the world’s rich got richer amid the worst recession in decades2). What I

am interested in, therefore, is looking at the natural and artifi cial proper-

ties of digital networks that generate inequality and exploring their social,

political, and economic impact both within the network and beyond it.

In other words, I am interested in a political economy of participation

in digital networks: looking at how the act of participation in digital net-

works increases the wealth of the corporations that own the networks

and fails to generate any substantial long- term gains for the participants,

even though it might seem to generate some short- term gains.

The starting premise, as many authors who have written about the

information society have argued, is that the network has become the dom-

inant operating logic of late capitalism. Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri,

for instance, write that “[i]n the passage to the informational economy,

the assembly line has been replaced by the network as the organizational

model of production, transforming the forms of cooperation and com-

munication within each productive site and among productive sites.”3 But

the network has become much more than a capitalist organizational para-

digm. It has become the means through which capitalism (which produces

inequality as a by- product of the generation of wealth) can profi t from

social exchange and cultural production. This is possible because the net-

work facilitates what Mark Andrejevic calls a digital enclosure.4 Much like

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 5

the transition from feudalism to capitalism involved the appropriation or

enclosure of communal lands by private interests, today’s digital enclosure

also commodifi es the public— not in the form of land, but in the form of

speech and social acts— and widens the economic gap between those who

own the means of production (the digital networks) and “those who sell

their labor for access to those means” (labor, in this context, means par-

ticipation in the network, which generates user information that “becomes

the property of private companies that can store, aggregate, sort, and in

many cases, sell the information to others in the form of a database or a

cybernetic commodity”).5

Thus digital networks are oppressive not by virtue of being digital or

being networks per se but by virtue of being part of a capitalist order

that produces inequality. The unfairness and inequality of participation

in digital networks is a diffi cult trend to observe given the fact that an

increase in access to digital networks is, most of the time, reported as a

sign of progress. In order to provide a clearer picture of this inequality,

we must consider not only arguments that show the immediate benefi ts

of a particular technology but also broader arguments that contrast the

increase of access and participation with more comprehensive societal

indicators. For instance, a Pew Internet and American Life Project survey

from July 2010 indicated that cell phone ownership in the United States

was higher among Latinos and African Americans (87 percent) than

among whites (80 percent).6 This would seem to suggest some progress

in terms of inclusion and perhaps even economic opportunity. How-

ever, when we contrast these data with the fact that the median wealth

of African Americans decreased 77 percent from 2007 to 2010 (in 2009,

it was $2,200 compared to a median net worth for white households of

$97,9007), it becomes apparent that access to the digital network does not,

by itself, translate into more equality. It might thus be helpful to speak of

the inequality generated through participation via digital networks in the

manner that Andre Gunder Frank8 spoke of underdevelopment: not as

the result of being excluded from the economic systems of capitalism,

but precisely as the result of being included and participating in them.

Participation in digital networks produces inequality because it is

asymmetrical. For instance, while users surrender their privacy for the

sake of convenience, network owners are increasingly opaque about the

ways in which they use the information they collect, as Andrejevic sug-

gests.9 The full range of inequalities that participation in digital networks

can produce has not been fully indexed, but it includes dynamics such

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

6 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

as the transformation of public goods into private goods once they are

uploaded to the network (think of the LOLCats.com model); the way in

which small social media projects are acquired by corporations who cap-

italize on the social labor of the site’s existing communities (like Yahoo!

in the case of Delicious.com), in some cases only to later disband those

communities when the parent company experiences fi nancial hardship;

the warrantless monitoring and surveillance of action and speech as

users participate in networks; and so on. These and many other examples

can be used to build a picture of the inequality networks are generat-

ing. But rather than proceed merely by documenting examples, my goal

in this book is to build a theoretical framework for understanding how

inequality is produced and, more important, how it can be disrupted.

While it would be valuable to quantify how participation in digital net-

works makes people poorer, we must begin by theorizing how the digital

network converts our participation into disparity in the fi rst place.

One of the ways in which it does this is through the commodifi cation

of the social— that is, by delegating more and more social processes to

the market. If certain social functions before were performed in the pub-

lic sphere and they are facilitated by for- profi t digital networks now, or

if new social functions emerge that can only be facilitated by for- profi t

digital networks, it means those social functions have been commodi-

fi ed, or transformed into something people are willing to exchange in a

market. Most users quickly appreciate that there is no free ride in digital

networks: we pay for “free” services every time there is an ad on a page.

Or as the adage of social media economics goes, If you are not paying

for it, you are not the customer; you are the product being sold. However,

most of us are happy to be such products, given what we perceive we get

in return. Participation in digital networks is not coercive in a straight-

forward manner.

Network Hegemony

If wealth in the digital network is not evenly distributed and participa-

tion is disadvantageous, why do we keep participating? In most cases,

we might not even be presented with a choice. The college at the State

University of New York (SUNY) where I work, for example, made the deci-

sion (like many other schools) to accept Google’s offer to handle all the

school’s e- mail “for free.” In the face of $410 million in state budget cuts

to SUNY in the past two years, it is understandable why public schools

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 7

are keen to save money wherever they can. And on the surface, getting

better functioning e- mail, a full menu of apps (including calendaring),

fi le storage, chat, as well as 2.5 gigs of storage sounds like a good deal.

But when I asked whether there would be other options for handling

our school e- mail, I was told this would be the only one. As I wrote in

our school newspaper,10 there are reasons why universities like Yale, UC

Davis, and Lakehead originally turned down similar deals with Google

or, in some cases, fi led grievances citing concerns about privacy and aca-

demic freedom (although in the two years since I wrote that, all three

institutions have switched to Google). For one thing, in these days of

cloud computing (where data are stored in remote company servers, not

in the user’s computer), who gets access to the data is a complex inter-

national legal question. If Google stores copies of our e- mail in 3 of its

450,000 servers located all over the world (for data redundancy purposes,

which keeps our data safe in the event of a server failure), some individ-

uals at the aforementioned universities had obviously been wondering

whether Google is obligated to hand over their e- mails if the correspond-

ing authorities in those countries come asking for them. In other words,

if my Google e- mail data and research are stored in Israel or Malaysia,

does that give those governments the right to monitor them? But beyond

the issue of surveillance by foreign or domestic authorities (in collabo-

ration with Google), my concern is that the decision to switch to Gmail

signifi es a further privatization of education by effectively putting every-

one at our public institution to work for Google, whether they choose

to or not. Let us not forget that Google derives 97 percent of its revenue

from advertising. And while switching to Gmail does not mean that my

colleagues and students started seeing ads for Viagra or teeth- whitening

products next to their in- box (Google Apps for Education is ad- free), it

does mean that Google is scanning our e- mails and documents to collect

more information about us, their users.11 The more Google knows about

us, the better it can sell that information to people who want to target ads

at us. The hegemony of networks is insidiously evident in examples such

as this one in which participation is presented as a fait accompli, in the

absence of options and alternatives, and as an almost naturalized form

of commodifi cation in which a social act (sending e- mail to students

and colleagues) is almost invisibly transformed into a revenue- creating

opportunity for a corporation.

Of course, it is presumptuous to assume that, given a choice, people

would opt not to use Gmail (most people at my school seemed to think

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

8 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

it was a fi ne idea, or they simply did not care). The fact of the matter

is that inequality in the digital network is not experienced as coercive

or unpleasant. To the contrary, because it appeals to our egos by allow-

ing us to express ourselves, participation in digital networks is creative

and pleasurable. Everyone feels welcomed because there is a place in

the network for everyone and everything. Inclusion is the default set-

ting. The inequalities that the network creates are overlooked by most

users because the network is perceived as a better provider of opportu-

nities and equality than the alternatives (social institutions or the state,

for instance).

The network thus represents a form of hegemony, a system of rule in

which a minority can rule over a majority not by brute force or decep-

tion but through consensus. From a Gramscian perspective,12 hegemonic

power is predicated on a harmonious relationship between unequal

social classes achieved through the formation of a popular discourse of

inclusion: political accommodation of the underprivileged allows the

ruling class to maintain its privileges by seeming to represent the inter-

ests of the ruled. In the context of digital networks, the trope of “total

inclusion” establishes hegemony by promoting the idea that the consen-

sual acceptance of the terms of use (which spell out precisely the way

in which we are to be ruled) is rewarded by the opportunity to have a

presence in the network on the same terms enjoyed by everyone else.

The illusory sense of empowerment is further reinforced by the idea that

there is no ruling body in the network. This is true to the extent that there

is often no centralized authority in most networks. But we could say that

the ruler in networks is network logic itself, which specifi es the param-

eters for interaction.

Consequently, participation in digital networks is seen as a produc-

tive, benefi cial, and enjoyable contribution to the social order (a form

of play mixed with labor). In some ways, this paradoxical relationship of

the participant to the digital network is reminiscent of the relationship

of the colonized subject to the colonial power. As Partha Chatterjee sug-

gests, the colonial project granted the colonized individuals subjecthood,

although it did not grant them citizenship13 (it offered them a worldview

in which they could locate themselves, but it restricted their participa-

tion by reducing them to a subjugated role). Likewise, I will be arguing

that the digital network can grant participants subjecthood and agency,

but because it produces inequality, it also constraints their rights. The

network, in short, can only function if members passively adhere to its

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 9

logic, not if they are actively engaged in questioning it. Hence there is

a need to begin to unmap the network, to transcend its determinism

through whatever strategies we might devise: obstruction of its growth,

disassembling of its parts, localization of its processes, intensifi cation of

its virtualities; hence there is a need, in other words, to resist a logic that

can only think in terms of nodes.

Nodocentrism

While the technological phenomenon is a powerful social determinant,

it is also true that humans are responsible for creating and determin-

ing technology in the fi rst place. Thus it is probably more exact to say

that humans and technologies codetermine each other. However, for

the moment let us continue to focus on the fact that network technolo-

gies play an important role in shaping our societies, and let us suggest,

therefore, that whereas before the network was merely a metaphor to

describe society, now it has become a technological model or template

for organizing it. A lot of socializing happens within the structures and

architectures of digital networks (as evidenced by the amount of time we

spend interacting with a human being through an electronic screen), but

this socializing is shaped by the network in very particular ways, resulting

in new ways of experiencing the world.

What I want to suggest is that what we are seeing is not only the

pervasive application of the network as a model or template for orga-

nizing society but also the emergence of the network as an episteme, a

system for organizing knowledge about the world. To better understand

this development, it should be pointed out that the network model and

the network episteme serve two different functions: whereas the model

is used to design and build actual networks, the episteme allows us to

understand the “networked” world, to see everything in terms of net-

works, and to apply network logic even to things that are not networks.

In other words, as social networks are facilitated or enabled by digital

technologies, the network ceases to function merely as an allegory used

to describe or study particular forms of collectivity. It becomes, fi rst, a

technological template for organizing the social; and second, it becomes

an episteme or a way to understand and access reality. This episteme not

only is facilitated by the technology but also transcends it, becoming a

knowledge structure, a way of seeing the world as composed of nodes

and links. The shift from metaphor to model to episteme (which will be

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

10 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

explored in more detail in subsequent chapters) signals a transition from

using the network to describe society to using the network to manage

or arrange society, defi ning the parameters for interaction within the

network by prescribing, or obstructing, certain kinds of social relations

between nodes.

The most consequential effect of superimposing this technological

template and episteme onto social structures is the rendering illegible of

everything that is not a node. I call this effect nodocentrism. In describ-

ing the relationship that nodes have to things internal and external to the

network, Manuel Castells writes,

The topology defi ned by networks determines that the distance (or inten-

sity and frequency of interaction) between two points (or social positions)

is shorter (or more frequent, or more intense) if both points are nodes in

a network than if they do not belong to the same network. On the other

hand, within a given network, fl ows have no distance, or the same distance,

between nodes. Thus, distance (physical, social, economic, political, cul-

tural) for a given point or position varies between zero (for any node in the

same network) and infi nite (for any point external to the network).14

Thus whereas the distance between two nodes that are part of the

same network is fi nite, the distance between something inside the net-

work and something outside the network is infi nite (even if, in spatial

terms, that distance is quite short). Nodocentrism means that while net-

works are extremely effi cient at establishing links between nodes, they

embody a bias against knowledge of— and engagement with— anything

that is not a node in the same network. Only nodes can be mapped,

explained, or accounted for. The point is not that nodocentrism in digital

networks impoverishes social life or devalues what is around us: nodes

behave neither antisocially (they thrive in linking to other nodes) nor

antilocally (they can link to other nodes in their immediate surround-

ing just as easily as they can link to remote nodes). The point, rather, is

that nodocentrism constructs a social reality in which nodes can only

see other nodes. It is an epistemology based on the exclusive reality of

the node. It privileges nodes while discriminating against what is not a

node— the invisible, the Other.

Nodocentrism does not provide an incorrect picture of the world, just

an incomplete one. It rationalizes a model of progress and development

in which those elements that are outside the network can only acquire

currency by becoming part of the network. “Bridging the digital divide”

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 11

is normalized as an end across societies that wish to partake of the ben-

efi ts of modernity. The assumption behind the discourse of the digital

divide is that one side, technologically advanced and accomplished,

must help the other side, technologically underdeveloped or retarded,

to catch up.15

The nature and ramifi cations of nodocentrism can be illustrated with

some quick examples.

Search engine results are examples of nodocentrism in the sense that

they point to documents, sites, or objects that have been indexed by the

network. What has not been indexed is not listed as a result, and it might

as well not even exist in the universe of knowable things as far as the

search engine is concerned.

Buddy lists, such as the ones used in instant messaging (IM) programs,

are examples of nodocentrism because they portray a social network

composed of the acquaintances available to chat on that program (even

if the friends are currently offl ine), but they render invisible the acquain-

tances who are not on the list because they do not use the same program

or because they do not use IM.

Nodocentrism is at work in accidents caused by following inaccurate

Global Positioning System (GPS) instructions, as when the GPS device

tells its user to drive into incoming traffi c or a body of water. By relying

on the simulated reality of the digital network over the reality of the ter-

rain, humans give precedence to the actuality of the node.

Similarly, when people are pulled from fl ights because the combi-

nation of their names, ethnicities, or religious backgrounds triggers

something in a no- fl y database, the process of selection of potential

threats exhibits a nodocentric logic. The defi nition of a threat according

to its characteristics as a node or its place in the network represents a

new way of applying network logic to security.

Algorithmically generated recommendation lists are another exam-

ple of nodocentrism. These lists might aggregate the opinions of large

communities of users, but in doing so, they also operationalize decisions

about what is included in and excluded from the list.

We also see nodocentrism at work in the digitization of archives,

making analog materials (texts, photographs, recordings, etc.) available

online. However, not all materials are digitized, or not all materials are

equally accessible to everybody. Nodocentrism can help us talk about the

politics of knowledge construction in an age when we seem to increas-

ingly depend on the digital network as a historical archive.

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

12 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

The articulation of nodocentrism and the kinds of inequalities it

produces might suggest that the normative goal of unmapping the

digital network is to give shape to a noncapitalist information society.

However, information, sociality, and capital are entangled today in such

a way that to suggest an easy separation would be simply naïve. Fur-

thermore, the spaces of resistance that digital networks have currently

opened up, no matter how circumscribed by corporate interests, are

important and should not be dismantled just yet. Therefore, it seems

prudent at this point to clarify some things about a book that— going by

its title alone— appears to issue a call to arms against digital networks.

This book will not be arguing that the existence of the digital network,

in and of itself, has negative consequences for humanity (I believe that

as the designers and users of digital networks, we— not they— are ulti-

mately responsible for what kind of impact they have on our society).

Furthermore, the book will not be calling on anyone to stop using dig-

ital networks or providing step- by- step instructions for dismantling

any kind of digital network. The point is not to embark on a journey

to some remote corner of our contemporary life to fi nd subjectivities

or sites untouched by digital networks. Thus this book will not be pro-

moting a network Luddism, because no responsible person can afford

to be a Luddite. In a world where 1.6 million cell phones are activated

every day, inclusion and exclusion from the network are everywhere—

embodied not only by the digital divide that separates the haves from

the have- nots but also by the digital divides that privilege some socio-

cognitive spaces and undermine others, or the interior digital divides

that separate our networked from our nonnetworked selves. Instead

of romanticizing some prenetworked state of being, this book will try

to get us to confront the tensions in those digital divides, because the

spaces on the “wrong” side of the divide— those not based on the pre-

dictable and controllable models prescribed by network logic— will

increasingly be considered threats to the network.

So while we need to be critical of the use of digital networks as plat-

forms for participation, I am not calling for a total rejection of the network

as a model for organizing sociality or the dismantling of for- profi t net-

works wherever they may be found. Rather, I believe that a reimagining

of identity beyond the templates of the network episteme is necessary to

articulate new models of participation, and that is what I mean by doing

the work of “disrupting” the digital world: unsettling, undermining, and

even unmapping what is oppressive in certain structures of thought. This

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 13

book strives to present a starting point for this kind of unthinking. While

some general strategies will be discussed, they will not be presented as

subversive tasks intended exclusively for hackers, anarchists, or dissent-

ers. To the extent that we each participate in digital networks, we are

all already engaged in the production of inequality, and we are all also

involved in the politics of inclusion and exclusion of the network. Fur-

thermore, no one enjoys absolute inclusion, so we are always already

occupying varying states of exclusion. Embodying the organizing logic

of the network is part of what we already do, perhaps without even real-

izing it, and it is the divide between the networked and nonnetworked

parts of our identity (the included and excluded parts) that we have to

become sensitive to.

While using networks to disrupt networks might make strategic sense

at times (what Hardt and Negri call fi ghting networks with networks16),

the goal of this work is to theorize models that ultimately move beyond

network logic altogether. Disrupting the digital network cannot rely only

on marginal strategies such as hacking, open-source/open- content para-

digms, peer- to- peer sharing, and so on because these strategies rely on

the same logic the network does, as I shall argue in later chapters. The

challenge is to acknowledge the fact that, since the network is agnostic

about what it assimilates and can thus easily extend its reach, there is “no

longer a place that can be recognized as outside.”17 This makes the task

of being against the network increasingly diffi cult, since in order to be

against one needs to occupy a position or framework outside the estab-

lished paradigm. To Hardt and Negri, this simply means that we must

be against everywhere— inside and at the same time outside the network

(and since every node has limits or borders, the outside is not just what

is external to the network but what lies internally between nodes). But if

nothing is really outside the logic of the network, how can we begin to

articulate the ethical and political meaning of being against the network?

The greatest obstacle today to the emergence of a critical theory of the

network episteme is, therefore, our inability to imagine an outside.

Beyond Networks

In the long term, perhaps more egalitarian organizations might emerge

from the process of disrupting or unmapping the network. But today, at

this very moment, it is unlikely we can either challenge or substitute the

network model if this means reorganizing technological infrastructures

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

14 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

and the economy at large. All we can hope for, perhaps, is to reorganize

our intimate ways of thinking. If unmapping is unthinking, it should

require no special tools or skills but the mind. The present goal of unmap-

ping the network, therefore, is to give the mind the tools to envision how

the network has shaped and molded us, to explain how the network has

determined us, and more important, to raise the possibility of alterna-

tives— to ask how we can determine it.

Perhaps this intellectual exercise is a good enough start, consider-

ing that network logic points to a crisis of imagination, specifi cally, to

a crisis of how we imagine ourselves as individuals in a community.

Defi ning the self in relation to the collective requires an investment

of multiple desires or affects that converge in the act of imagining a

community. In other words, community can be said to be the intersec-

tion (whether benign or violent) of affects that start as imagined and,

through the process of communication, crystallize into social prac-

tices. As Etienne Balibar suggests (in his analysis of Spinoza), it is in the

collective process of imagining community that we communicate our

desires and work out “the relationship through which affects communi-

cate between themselves, and therefore the relationship through which

individuals communicate through their affects.”18 In one way, networks

open up new ways for individuals to communicate affectively, giving

way to new forms of community and participation. But as has already

been suggested, the network determines those forms of community

according to specifi c interests. We might be fascinated by the digital

network as a new form of imagined community,19 but we need to ask,

Whose imagined community?20 Who is doing the imagining, and who

is merely living in the product of someone else’s imagination? If hege-

monic power is inscribed in networked communities, we need to ask

what the network template leaves for us to imagine, which is why the

network template represents, to paraphrase Chatterjee,21 a colonization

of our collective power to imagine community.

It is, in fact, the very appeal of the digital network as a cultural meta-

phor for imagining community that makes it particularly restrictive as a

social determinant. The digital network is a ready- made image into which

we can pour our hopes for social unity and connectivity. We can point

to a location in the network map and say “that’s me!,” while admiring

the wealth of our social capital. A network map thus becomes an ego-

tistic object for aesthetic contemplation: it is visually pleasing, dynamic,

and it is about us. It is the social world turned into an interactive mirror,

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 15

miniaturized and projected onto a screen for our pleasure. The digi-

tal network signifi es the aestheticization of the social, a means for the

masses to contemplate a simulation of themselves and express them-

selves through this simulation. But it also represents an arena of restricted

or diminished opportunities for meaningful political and social action.

Walter Benjamin had already described similar dynamics in relation to

Fascism. According to him, the emerging Fascist rulers recognized and

feared the potential of the masses to change property relations; in order

to preserve the traditional property system, Fascism found its salvation

“in giving these masses not their right, but instead a chance to express

themselves”22, thus introducing aesthetics into political life. In other

words, Fascism granted the masses subjecthood, the ability to express

themselves, as a way to avoid granting them more active powers. Inter-

estingly, for Benjamin the aestheticization of the political involved the

masses accepting reproduction (what we would call simulation) in lieu of

the “uniqueness of every reality.”23 Likewise, today’s networked masses

are encouraged to express themselves in a simulated social sphere that

contributes to the reproduction of inequality. They are encouraged to

accept the network map in place of the “banality” of unnetworked space

and to express themselves through it. The rendering of politics as aes-

thetics satisfi es the need for sociality while respecting the traditional

forms of property on which capitalism is founded.

Thus far, there has not been a widespread movement to challenge the

hegemony of the network and its colonizing imaginary. Hegemonic rule

depends on widespread consensus, which in network terms means all

nodes subscribe to the same protocols and accept the same models of

social participation. Public intellectuals (media gurus, academics, etc.)

who advocate that digital networks are being used to empower the public

are only undermining our potential to free ourselves from the hypnotic

hold of this aestheticized form of sociality. This is why there is a need

to theorize how new imagined communities can be different from the

template- based communities of the digital network. At the same time,

any alternative would have to organize itself in order to survive, and that

form of organization would probably look and act just like a network.

While I am attempting to critique the network as a digital template for

sociality, I also recognize that the network, as an organizational form, can

be useful. If the only way the excluded can unsettle network hegemony

is to fi rst organize themselves into a networked multitude that eventu-

ally rejects, subverts, or disinvests itself from network templates, so be it.

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

16 . T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D

Unmapping the digital network needs to involve both working within the

spaces of resistance that digital networks have already made available

and asking what it means to obliterate those very spaces.

This brings me back to the project of imagining and thinking alter-

natives, right here and now, using the digital network as a starting point.

Digital networks map unto a social domain what was before unimagi-

nable, reorganizing the possible. They are the result of previous social

models as well as new, emerging ones. This actualization of the vir-

tual unveils new associations, new ways in which things that were not

linked before are now related, and also in which other things are now

excluded or forgotten. Disrupting the network prevents the energy of

nodes from becoming arrested or complacent, and unleashes it in new

directions, as nodes begin to unthink themselves. From the perspective

of the node, the witnessing of the ethical resistance of the outside (the

way it is excluded, the way it resists assimilation) can lead to the kind of

self- questioning that can generate personal and social change. Sensing

the limits of nodes within and outside us can lead to the alteration of

our intimate ways of knowing the world through an increasingly domi-

nant corporate nodocentrism. It is ultimately about changing the way

we understand others and ourselves.

Thus while this is a book about thinking and unthinking networks,

it is also a book about alterity and othering— about the way we imag-

ine and engage difference. Specifi cally, it is about the ethics of othering.

In the standard view of interaction in a network, we have two or more

nodes struggling to communicate in the presence of noise, as depicted in

the Shannon– Hartley theorem, which calculates the maximum amount

of data that can be transmitted given a specifi ed bandwidth and noise

interference. Noise— we have always assumed (at least since Shannon’s

“Mathematical Theory of Communication” was published in 1949)— is a

barrier to interaction, and this model has infl uenced our development of

communication theories and technologies. The Internet, however, prac-

tically eliminated the problem of noise through digitization and packet

switching (distributing information in small chunks through multiple

channels). But the project of unmapping the network asks if we have per-

haps invisibilized noise too quickly and too effi ciently. Noise, in network

terms, is nonnodal— it is not simply a meaningless sound but a sound

that does not conform to the harmonies of the network. The project of

disrupting or unmapping the network and encountering its outsides is

one that goes from trying to solve the problem of communicating in the

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

T H E N E T W O R K A S M E T H O D . 17

presence of noise to one that sees noise as communicating presence, the

presence of the Other. In short, noise communicating difference. It is

only in the outside spaces of the network, beyond the limits of nodes,

where we can acquire enough clarity to listen to the sounds that alterna-

tive subjectivities, even from within us, might suggest.

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

This page intentionally left blank

This content downloaded from 128.250.144.144 on Mon, 10 Apr 2017 06:29:38 UTC All use subject to http://about.jstor.org/terms

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Digital Media - The Network as a Method for Organizing the World.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Embracing CHanging Journalism - New Era of Media.pdf

Commentary

The Changing Role of Journalism Embracing the Audience in the New Era

Katharine Murphy1

Abstract

Journalism in the midst of a profound structural adjustment. In the last decade digital technology has disrupted print journalism, requiring journalists to rethink how they deliver content to audiences. But disruption has not altered the central mission of the profession. This article considers key trends, including the rise of the reader, the rolling news cycle, the impact of rolling news on the quality of journalism being produced, and the consequences of these changes for political discussion. The article ends with some observations intended for journalists just entering the profession.

Keywords

Digital technology, rolling news, news cycle, journalism values, active readers, audience engagement, beat journalism, feedback

Talking about ‘then and now’ is always a trap, and a fiendish one in these challenging days when Australian journalism is buffeted by profound structural change. Nostalgia dictates that things were always so much better in the olden days when we had certainty.

It is all right—you can relax. I have no intention of boring you senseless with syrupy sentiment in this article. I am confident I missed journalism’s golden age—if there was in fact a golden age. But I do want to start with a personal counterpoint, because it helps me sift through how things have changed in the almost 20 years I have been hacking away in the parliamentary press gallery in Canberra.

In January 1996, I showed up at the Senate entrance of parliament house, waiting to be signed in by my new colleagues at the Australian Financial Review

1 Deputy Political Editor, Guardian Australia.

Corresponding author: Katharine Murphy, Deputy political editor, Guardian Australia, Canberra Bureau, Parliamentary Press Gallery, Parliament House, Canberra, ACT 2600. E-mail: [email protected]

Asia Pacific Media Educator 25(2) 146–155

© 2015 University of Wollongong, Australia

SAGE Publications sagepub.in/home.nav

DOI: 10.1177/1326365X15604249 http://ame.sagepub.com

Murphy 147

(AFR). I was then in my mid-twenties. I had had an accidental first career thrust upon me by the recession in the early 1990s—I had been a public servant since my exit from university because I had been lucky enough to get a graduate cadetship at a time when it was very hard to get a job.

Between 1992 and 1996 (with a year off wandering the world), I worked in three government departments: industrial relations, the environment, and communications and the arts. As a consequence, I knew about policy—how proposals tracked up through departments and over to parliament house and back again. I had been a very junior sausage maker, attached to some very experienced and connected bosses. And as a consequence of the sort of work I did, I knew ministerial staff, a number of bureaucrats and some press gallery folk. That was my value to the AFR: knowing something of the working of government from the inside.

These days, when young reporters wait, full of anticipation, at the Senate entrance for their colleagues to sign them in for their first day on the Canberra beat, they have been selected for different reasons. Knowing something of the territory still matters, it is still desirable self-evidently—but proven capacity in the rigours of the 24/7 news cycle, and digital fluency probably, matters more, at least in the mainstream press.

The AFR might still hire the odd person like me, but I suspect I would struggle to get in the door anywhere else. I was a lateral hire, a risk. I knew what I knew, but I needed to be taught on the job how to be a journalist. Canberra political reporting is one of the most competitive and relentless environments in Australian journalism. The cycle never sleeps. These days we are too busy for risks, or for intense on-the-job incubation.

When I walked in to the parliamentary press gallery in January 1996, I walked into a corridor populated by big newspaper bureaus and big television and radio bureaus.

There was bustle, but it was an orderly sort of business. We worked hard, or we thought we did. Down the newspaper end of the corridor, we filed several stories a day in a great rush in the evening. Our job was not to record the moment, it was to throw forward. We were concerned with tomorrow’s news, not today’s. We were print, and proudly so, writers.

There was no rolling news cycle, apart from the wire services and the hard- working radio journalists, who filed every hour. We were not podcasters, bloggers, photographers, television talking heads, live radio talent, tweeters, Facebookers, Instagramers or Periscopers.

At least we were not until the great disruption, and by the great disruption, I mean, of course, the arrival of the Internet. Digital, when it arrived, smashed all the old, long-cherished demarcations. The era of specialization was behind us.

Nobody asked us whether or not we wanted this to happen, it just happened, and we had to adjust. Some of us did not get the chance to adjust—successive redundancy rounds loomed grimly alongside our brave new world.

So, I had 10 years of being just one thing. My next 10 years in political journalism was a decade of constant transition,

which has completely revolutionized the way I do things. While the ‘what’ and the

148 Asia Pacific Media Educator 25(2)

‘how’ of what I do is a world away from the comparative calm of 1996, the jour- nalistic mission has remained constant, and the values underpinning my practice have become more important than ever.

In this article, I would like to share some of the changes of this period, and consider their impact on my journalism.

Active Readers and Established Beats

The most significant change over my decade in transition has been the rise of the reader. At the start of my career, I was a print journalist. I wrote for a newspaper. Readers were important but distant. They were on the letters page. There was my dentist, who took great delight in informing his receptionist that this woman who was about to be liberated from her wisdom teeth ‘worked at the Financial Review’. There was the odd person at a party. There were the regular letter writers, often elderly, sometimes abusive.

I am no longer a print journalist. Technology has pushed me into another professional form—a digital form. That same technology has brought readers much closer.

They talk to me, and each other, at length in the comments thread under the live blog I write when federal parliament sits. They are in my inbox 24/7, with tips, bouquets and brickbats. They want to follow me in Instagram and Facebook, and they talk to me on Twitter. They give me instant feedback when I am on Insiders on the Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC), or on the radio, or Sky News. The reader is now right beside me, because technology connects us all, and makes everyone a micro-publisher.

The American journalism academic Rosen (2006) calls modern news consum- ers ‘the people formerly known as the audience’. He likens them to passengers on a ship who have decamped in order to build a boat of their own.

The people formerly known as the audience wish to inform media people of our existence, and of a shift in power that goes with the platform shift you’ve all heard about. Think of passengers on your ship who got a boat of their own. The writing readers. The viewers who picked up a camera. The formerly atomized listeners who with modest effort can connect with each other and gain the means to speak—to the world, as it were. (Rosen, 2006)

Katharine Viner, launch editor of Guardian Australia, and now the editor-in-chief of our global operation, explains the change thus:

Digital is not about putting up your story on the web. It’s about a fundamental redraw- ing of journalists’ relationship with our audience, how we think about our readers, our perception of our role in society, our status. We are no longer the all-seeing all- knowing journalists, delivering words from on high for readers to take in, passively, save perhaps an occasional letter to the editor. Digital has wrecked those hierarchies

Murphy 149

almost overnight, creating a more levelled world, where responses can be instant, where some readers will almost certainly know more about a particular subject than the journalist. (Viner, 2013)

To people outside contemporary journalism, noting this change might seem a simple cultural curiosity. But as Viner and Rosen correctly assert, operationally, this is a major structural shift.

Once journalists could get away with ‘voice of God’ journalism—preaching to an audience with confected certainties. It was a fiction so absurd it could only be sustained in an era when the readers did not actually talk back. Once readers gained equality with the folks paid to put down the first draft of history, once they gained the option to micro-publish and share their interventions, the jig was well and truly up. Our tone had to shift. Journalists, readers and viewers will be delighted to know, have had humility thrust upon us. Not all of us, mind you. But some of us, certainly.

From my own perspective, the rise of the reader is a welcome development. At its best, the new environment is more democratic, more vibrant, more interest- ing, more stimulating and more honest, both for the journalist and for the reader.

I have pushed the engagement philosophy in my own practice. I make it a priority to speak to readers ‘below the line’—in the comments threads under my live politics blog or my Dispatches column. I also engage with readers on social media.

I think all contemporary journalists should approach readers as equal participants in the national discourse.

Not just say that. Mean it. But the equality philosophy presents the working journalists with an interesting

conundrum. If we are no longer asserting our privileged status, can we still assert the value of our specialist knowledge?

I believe we can. And the reason we can is because Canberra remains an important bedrock of

‘beat’ journalism. In my view, the journalistic beat is the heart of who we are, and what we do. Technology may have transformed print and broadcast specialists into vaguely harried multitaskers, but technology has not changed the mission. The journalistic mission remains at its simplest: know your patch, and use your knowledge to try and tell readers what is actually going on.

As former The Baltimore Sun journalist David Simon—creator of TV shows like The Wire and Treme—says on the subject of beat journalism:

The reason I am able to tell you this story is not because I am now an amateur or because I have a blog. It is, above all, because a news organization paid me for years on end to cover the same approximate beat on a full-time basis. I did it for 50 or 60 hours a week because The Baltimore Sun had a sufficient revenue stream to pay me a living wage and benefits so that I could take a mortgage and raise a family and show up to do the work on a daily basis. (Simon, 2012)

As the industry contracts, it is beat journalism that finds itself most under threat. It is hard to maintain a rounds structure or a beat structure when the newsroom is

150 Asia Pacific Media Educator 25(2)

shrinking, and there are more platforms to service in any given 24 hours. As a devotee of the beat, I have a rakish pride in Canberra’s capacity to roll on relentlessly in flagrant opposition to an industry trend, which, on my analysis, is our most troubling form of iterative extinction.

By rolling on, I mean this: we show up. We get to know the protagonists. We watch the cycles of politics, long enough to see them repeat. We outlast the various ministerial staff and often the ministers who periodically vow to extract terrible career-ending revenge because something undesirable has been written. As one of the press gallery’s leading lights, Laura Tingle, noted to the social services minister Scott Morrison at a National Press Club event in February 2015: ‘I plan to be here long after I’ve seen you off.’ Morrison’s response to that light-hearted provocation? ‘Wonderful.’ Tingle’s response to that: ‘I thought you’d be pleased’ (Tingle, 2015).

We do acquire expert knowledge. But in order to continue to say that, we need to be worthy of trust.

Trust requires honesty. It requires some collective self-knowledge. Here is my personal contribution to that collective requirement. We political journalists do not always get things right. We sometimes produce race call commentary and gotcha rubbish that is not worth the reader’s time. We can lapse into herd instincts. Some of us are capable of abuses of power. We can also be captured by the protagonists, which might work for them, but does not work for the reader.

Remaining independent for a political journalist is a conscious choice. You have to want to be independent, even if it means you are off the Christmas card list, or the prime minister’s office ‘accidentally on purpose’ forgets to brief you when they have briefed 10 other colleagues. You can miss stories when you refuse to act as someone’s drop box. Missing stories is generally frowned upon by the bosses in our line of work, so politicians and their operatives use the baseline anxiety to try and herd cats, or they use information in calculated ways— briefing a person they want to advance, blocking a person they do not approve of. It is quite funny at one level, the pettiness of it. Sometimes the kindergarten tactics work, sometimes they do not. Asserting independence requires a certain clarity of mission: ‘I write for readers, I don’t write to amplify your agenda, or to impress someone.’

As a journalist who goes looking for audience feedback, I hear rather a lot of it. I hear how deficient I am, or how deficient the parliamentary press gallery is. I hear how the gallery makes things up, how various journalists are undeclared cyphers for various politicians. I get told I am an idiot for writing that Tony Abbott is intelligent, or that I have a corrosive bias against Bill Shorten.

The feedback about my own work and my profession is incredibly willing. Practising political journalism in 2015, if you are pushing out to readers rather

than standing back convinced you know better, is a bit like being a surgeon performing a delicate operation while a small crowd gathers to tell you how you should be cutting, or stitching, or clamping.

As I have already noted, some of the criticism about gallery reporting is entirely justified. But I do periodically consume criticism of the press gallery that is about as shallow and uninformed as the worst of our work.

Murphy 151

The gallery is regularly said to be monolithic. We are not. My corridor in 2015 is populated by a diverse group of journalists working at different levels with different personal aspirations. Some of us work for good bosses who prize the integrity of the work above all else. Some of us do not.

Some of the shallow critiques readily traverse the what, but never pause to ask why. Fact is we are working in challenging conditions: the most challenging con- ditions that I have yet experienced. The rolling news cycle creates conditions where small things can gain disproportionate coverage (more of this shortly). This is a very broad generalization, but it think it holds—we have gone from the placid news cycle I started in, which served to amplify the messages of politicians in largely orderly and linear fashion—to a cycle of constant cross-current, conten- tion and disruption. It can be hard to keep your feet, your nerve and your clarity in such conditions. (More of that shortly too, a phenomenon which also affects politics, not just journalists).

To summarize the arguments: Canberra is a journalistic beat, and mastery of the beat remains the essence of daily journalism. But to continue to assert that right, we need to be accurate, we need to be trustworthy and we need to listen to voices and perspectives other than our own. Listen. Yes, really.

Capturing the reader’s trust is central to our mission. In my view, it is the most important thing we now do, and the way we do it is by reaching out, explaining and building community.

There are no shortcuts.

The Importance of the Audience and the Lure of the ‘New’

The rise of the Internet and the proximity of the audience have increased the intensity of everything in our professional world. We have entered a fully connected life, which both enriches and punishes its inhabitants.

Audiences want their news now. They do not want to wait for us to think for several more hours before bringing them up to speed; they want it in real time.

Our analytical audience measurement tools tell us with brutal precision what audiences are reading, how long they read it for and how much they have shared it.

Keeping audiences engaged has become an existential challenge for daily commercial media journalism. With readers, we can generate revenue, and live. If they desert us, we die.

I have already indicated that the digital news cycle requires a completely different approach than print. Our working day begins much earlier, and often wraps up late. We do not just write anymore, we talk on video, we podcast, we blog, we live stream and we meme.

We have had to will our minds to work faster, to not only chase new facts but to provide clarity and context in the moment, because that is the expectation of the audience.

The rolling news cycle is a hungry beast, and its fuel is the ‘new’.

152 Asia Pacific Media Educator 25(2)

The print cycle of two decades ago imposed a simple discipline. ‘New’ was not enough to make the cut. The development had to be both new and important.

If it was new and important, it would appear on page one or page three or page five—still important 24 hours after it happened. The important made it to the top of the list, and the intra-day static fell away to three paragraphs at the bottom of the story, or to the cutting room floor.

I am not meaning to imply the old print cycle saved readers from inaccuracies or defamations or distortions or poor judgements—it did not, of course. But scarcity did impose a discipline that is fast becoming an anachronism. It is not uncommon to see a story running prominently on a news website that would not have made the paper 20 years ago—simply because it is new, not because we really need to know. Good news organizations still apply the old judgement matrix, a story must be both new and important to be displayed prominently. But these values are not always applied universally.

From my perspective, the consequential professional response to the rise of the reader should be to deliver better, richer, more informed and more collaborative journalism, because there are ample opportunities to do just that. Our collective ambition should not be to dish up breaking fluff with an over-egged headline in the desperate hope that audiences will fail to grasp the difference.

But this sort of integrity can be hard to assert. It requires editorial leaders to keep their heads and their feet in a maelstrom. It requires reporters to say no when they are asked to produce or chase material devoid of value, and offer up smarter ways of coming at the content.

In short, prioritizing quality over disposability requires experience, guts and a steady hand, and it requires the professional will to make the web serve rather than allowing the thready impulses of the web or the bandwagon culture of social media to enslave the journalism. It is very easy for breaking canapés, or breaking gossip, or breaking half facts to shoot to the top of Google news alerts, or start trending on social media, which generates entirely rational pressure for news websites to jump on board and chase those clicks.

The Impact of Our Structural Transition on Politics

Politicians and journalists are adversaries, but there is a symbiosis between the tribes as well. We both operate in a world where public validation powers our mandate.

To put this more starkly, we both rise and fall at the whim of our audiences. When journalism sped up—when the rolling networks entered the fray, when news- papers became 24-hour digital operations—politics accelerated also. Politicians and political journalists have moved in lockstep from brisk walk to sprint.

As quickly as the media creates new platforms or modes of communication, politicians stretch to fill them, and stretching to fill them has consequences for the quality and efficacy of their communications.

Politics can tame the echo chamber. It is possible to climb on a Jet Ski and ride the choppiness in advantageous ways. But the cycle does make governing increasingly difficult.

Murphy 153

Politics in most liberal democracies is increasingly at war with an accelerating and fragmenting news cycle that in short order renders everything more disposable and forgettable and obsolescent, whether it is profound or whether it is trivial. The current fragmentation and the rolling bandwagon culture of the online world and social media also works against the interests of activist governments with any reform ambition.

Former New York mayor and media owner Michael Bloomberg spoke about the culture of the instant referendum in an interview with The New Yorker in 2013. ‘Modern technology is making it very difficult to govern,’ Bloomberg said. He added:

This is going to be one of the big problems down the road. Traditionally, we’ve elected somebody to a term and they have that term to do things and then explain why it’s the right thing to do, and to prove it’s the right thing to do before they have to face the voters again. We’re going into a world where there’s an instant referendum on everything before it even starts. And I think that’s going to change how decisions are made in government for the worse. (Auleta, 2013)

I do not have any particular answers on this question, and ultimately, it is up to politics to make its own transition—but the phenomenon is something we need to note in any snapshot of political journalism in the here and now.

Our structural adjustment is not only professionally interesting but also consequential for the national affairs discourse. Disruption has been visited on us, and, as a consequence, politics is feeling the northerlies too.

Some Thoughts for Young Journalists

I want to end this article by looping back to the beginning. I entered political journalism in my mid-twenties as a lateral hire. As I noted in the opening, I am entirely confident I would not get a job now.

In 1996, I walked into a fully staffed Canberra bureau where senior correspon- dents had time to mentor my transition from public servant to journalist. I owe my career to a handful of people who worked very intensively with me to make sure I made that transition successfully. Now senior correspondents in Canberra, and news editors, have less time. There is no less will, no less professional generosity, but there is less time. Bureaus are smaller than they were a decade ago, and the demands on their denizens are exponentially greater.

Now there is a tendency to bring in new recruits with a proven track record in metropolitan newsrooms, and there is an expectation that everyone will do a bit of everything, not specialize in a particular journalistic skill set. Part of what employ- ers are looking for is energy and acumen: surviving the rigours of Canberra’s highly competitive breaking news culture requires a significant capacity for hard work, and it requires having the skills and networks to promote your own work.

Getting the work out there is now a collective exercise, not a contribution made externally by newsagents and other distributors. Dealing your work into the digital conversation is an important requirement of contemporary journalism.

154 Asia Pacific Media Educator 25(2)

Young reporters seeking to come to Canberra for a long time or for a short time are walking into a more chaotic and demanding and uncertain and contested professional world than the one I entered. But it is a richer ecosystem in almost every respect.

It is a more diverse world. The digital revolution has opened the field for new players. The young reporters formerly known as print journalists do not now just have to wonder whether they will work for News Corporation or for Fairfax Media. They can now also contemplate working for Guardian Australia, or Crikey, or BuzzFeed, or Junkee, or for the Huffington Post, or for the online sites of the ABC and Special Broadcasting Service (SBS). The offering is more vibrant than it was a decade ago—and that is before we get to the blogs and specialist publications—but of course, it is no utopia. Well-paid secure jobs are very hard to find, and the future of commercial media remains uncertain.

News organizations have distinct editorial voices, and presentational styles, meaning there is no one size fits all. The nascent diversity means young reporters need to have digital skills, social media fluency and a flexible attitude—and I think reporters who understand and embrace a reader-centred philosophy will put themselves philosophically where they need to be in order to prosper in their chosen vocation.

While young reporters need new skills, the advice I got from my mentors 20 years ago remains constant. Get your facts straight, and if you do not have your facts straight, do not rush to publish them.

The digital world can sanction the corrosive ‘never wrong for long’ philosophy, but while the technology allows rapid resetting in the event of error, adopt a blasé attitude at your peril. If contemporary journalism demands that the reporter cultivate their personal brand, and enter a contract with an active reader where trust is central to the sharing and the conversation, then accuracy is actually more important now than it has ever been.

I do a great deal of live work at Guardian Australia, which exposes me to the constant risk of error, overstatement and cock-up. I am periodically guilty of all of these sins. But I am also clear in my approach, having presided over a live blog for several years—I would rather be running just behind the action with reliable content than just ahead of the action with speculative or unreliable content.

Older reporters always have a tendency to say this to younger reporters, but it is right in the main. The second piece of advice, apart from get it right, is watch and learn before you give the readers the benefit of your wisdom.

The cycle is hungry for content, and for opinion, the more outrageous the better. The best thing that ever happened to me as a reporter was being encouraged by my mentors to listen and watch and learn and serve a careful apprenticeship before I wandered into analytical territory. The views I would have been delighted to express to anyone who would listen during my first 10 years on the job would really not have been worth listening to, so I am very glad I did not have the opportunity to share them.

Political reporting in 2015 requires tenacity, at times it requires courage, it requires nuance—a vastly underrated attribute in our ‘shouty’ world—it requires

Murphy 155

the capacity to keep your feet, both with the new material that thrusts itself to you 24/7, and with the political class who are always intent on cajoling, hectoring or, otherwise, persuading you to accept the rightness and inherent virtue of their various propositions.

It requires a deep scepticism, which should never be confused with a deep cynicism. As Oscar Wilde once observed, a cynic is someone who knows the price of everything and the value of nothing.

My vocation requires you to play a long game, even if you only inhabit the hot house for a short time.

But what it requires now, 20 years ago, 20 years from now, is truth seekers. It does not matter what platform we produce on, whether the demands are

many or few, whether there is certainty, the illusion of certainty, or no certainty at all—the vocation is constant.

It requires a deep-seated desire to serve the public by speaking truth to power.

References

Auleta, K. (2013). After Bloomberg. New Yorker. Retrieved from http://www.newyorker. com/magazine/2013/08/26/after-bloomberg (accessed on 25 September 2015).

Rosen, J. (2006, June 27). The people formerly known at the audience. Press Think. Retrieved from http://archive.pressthink.org/2006/06/27/ppl_frmr.html (accessed on 25 September 2015).

Simon, D. (2012). Dirt under the rug. The Audacity of Despair. Retrieved from http://davidsimon.com/dirt-under-the-rug/ (accessed on 25 September 2015).

Tingle, L. (2015, February 26). Cited by the author in Politics Live. Guardian Australia. Retrieved from http://www.theguardian.com/australia-news/live/2015/feb/25/report- points-to-radical-welfare-overhaul-politics-live (accessed on 25 September 2015).

Viner, K. (2013, October 9). The rise of the reader. AN Smith lecture. Retrieved from http:// www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/oct/09/the-rise-of-the-reader-katharine- viner-an-smith-lecture (accessed on 25 September 2015).

Author’s bio-sketch

Katharine Murphy is deputy political editor of Guardian Australia. Previously, she has worked for The Age, The Australian and The Australian Financial Review. She is a winner of the Paul Lyneham Award for Excellence in Press Gallery Journalism and has been a Walkley finalist twice: for digital journalism and for commentary. Katharine is a regular commentator on television and radio, including on the ABC’s Insiders programme. She is also an adjunct associate professor of journalism at the University of Canberra. E-mail: [email protected]

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Embracing CHanging Journalism - New Era of Media.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/From Media Moguls to Money Men - Media Concentrations In Australia.pdf

22

Media International Australia

Michael Pusey and Marion McCutcheon

Abstract This article examines how the Howard government’s 2006 media ownership rules affected the concentration of ownership of Australian commercial television and radio services and newspapers. It reviews the historical context of these changes and presents new data on ownership in the light of attitude surveys showing that a large majority of Australians believe media owners have too much power. It shows that the new ownership regime has led to more rather than less concentration of ownership, and explains how the 2006 rules both give primacy to economic market considerations and further sideline other priorities of quality and democratic governance of the media.

It is well known that Australia has one of the highest concentrations of media ownership in the world (McAllister et al., 2011). One is entitled to ask why this matters. The answers are several – some universal and others particular to the Australian setting.

Liberal,1 ‘fourth estate’ standards of journalistic independence and diversity of opinion are essential conditions for informed citizenship and freedom of speech, and hence for the proper functioning of liberal democracy (Schultz, 1998; Norris, 2003; Couldry et al., 2007). By those standards, Australia compares poorly with most other developed OECD nations, especially those nations that normally are assumed to characterise the liberal model (Hallin and Mancini, 2004; McAllister et al., 2011).

The Australian situation has much to do with the historic domination of the Australian media by the three media dynasties of Packer, Fairfax and Murdoch. All three asserted their private commercial and political interests strongly, and used proprietorial influence in ways that flouted journalistic and editorial independence. The weakness of ‘watchdog’, ‘fourth estate’ controls has been exacerbated further by the comparatively low funding levels for Australian public service broadcasters and their low share of the television viewing audience (Tiffen and Gittens, 2009). This did not, however, prevent the conservative Howard government’s attacks on both the critical independence and funding of public broadcasting in Australia. Further, the professionalisation of journalism came relatively late to Australia, and commercial broadcast journalism functions with minimal regulation for accuracy and impartiality (Jones and Pusey, 2008; Henningham, 1996).

There is a resounding answer to objections that these concerns reflect only the self- serving or elitist views of a progressive middle class. Data from successive waves of the Australian National University’s Australian Survey of Social Attitudes (AuSSA) show that a majority of Australians – 80 per cent in 2003 and 70 per cent in 2007 – thought that commercial media ownership was too concentrated (Jones and Pusey, 2008; Wilson et al.,

FroM the MediA Moguls to the Money Men? MediA ConCentrAtion in AustrAliA

23

No. 140 — August 2011

2005).2 During this same period, 2003–07, the Howard government was positioning to loosen the cross-media rules put in place in 1987 by the Hawke government. In 2007, we saw the advent of new cross-media rules and the lifting of foreign ownership restrictions. Media owners no longer needed to choose to be merely a queen of screen or prince of print – they could now rule the airwaves.

Since 2006 there has been a further deepening of concentration of media ownership. In some respects, this was a predictable result of a reform paradigm that is narrowly economic and that gives scant attention to the public interest. As in so many other areas of neo-liberal reform, it was assumed that the economic priorities of new competition policies oriented to a diversity of ownership would suffice to ensure diversity and quality of media content and a political-democratic balance in the reporting and coverage of news and current affairs.

At the outset, it should be noted that the focus of this article is the effect of the 2006 cross-media rule changes on the concentration of ownership of Australian commercial radio and commercial television services and newspapers. It considers what the changes have meant for media diversity and why we should be concerned.

some background It is important to note that different parts of the Australian media are subject to different regulatory approaches. The print, video and film industries are treated in a similar way to other Australian industries, with some sectors receiving government subsidies to encourage the production and distribution of Australian stories. The broadcasting industry, on the other hand, is regulated more heavily, by virtue of its use of scarce public spectrum, its pervasiveness and its impact on society. The Broadcasting Services Act 1992 (BSA) was one of the first pieces of legislation put in place under the Hawke government’s 1987 micro-economic reform agenda. It aims to promote an efficient and competitive broadcasting sector, while allowing for refinements that take into account judgements about the influence of broadcasting in society (DOTAC, 1993).

Australian media law assumes that a balance in programming and information can, to some extent, be achieved through ensuring balance in ownership. There are strong incentives for media businesses to expand their holdings, exclude competitors and increase ownership concentration. Broadcasters can maximise economies of scale and scope by establishing networks and thus spreading production costs across product and geographic markets. Potential efficiency gains also encourage vertical expansion – broadcasters produce their own content, and producers distribute their programs. Horizontal and vertical integration can both lead to concentration of ownership, limiting the number of available media sources. An overly concentrated media can allow abuses of power, lack of diversity of opinion, conflicting interests and suppression of journalistic freedom (Pearson and Brand, 2001: 7, 28–29; Doyle, 2000).

From an economic point of view, all of these issues represent market failures, justifying a unique regulatory framework (Withers, 2003). To mitigate the market failures typical of broadcasting, governments have tailored specific regulations. These include rules about who can hold a licence and how they are required to use that licence. Ownership rules aim to ensure a diversity of ownership, on the assumption that this will yield a diversity of opinion and content. As well as being designed to underpin diversity, content rules ensure access to vulnerable programming and limit access to morally questionable content.

Clearly, then, regulatory intervention in broadcasting, and to a lesser extent print media, is integral to ensuring a balance between market forces and the public interest.

24

Media International Australia

Cross-media ownership Ownership and control rules usually take the following forms: • group ownership rules – limits upon the number of services that can be owned or

controlled by any one entity • cross-media ownership rules – limits on ownership or control of media services by

owners of other media, and • foreign ownership rules – limits on the ownership or control of services by non-

nationals (Brown and Cave, 1992: 386).

Broadcasters in Australia have always been subject to group ownership and, until recently, foreign ownership rules; however, there are no Australian laws requiring diversity of press ownership (Armstrong et al., 1995). In 1987, the Hawke government introduced the cross-media rules, replacing group ownership restrictions with reach limits and restrictions on the number of commercial radio licences that could be held in any one licence area. The 1987 changes prevented cross-ownership between radio, television or newspaper services in any licence area (Table 1). The then Treasurer, Paul Keating, famously explained that that media owners would need to choose between being a prince of print or queen of screen. The changes triggered a series of takeovers, with all commercial television networks changing hands, and then, in the case of Nine, back again. The 1987 rules carried over into the BSA.

Through the 1990s and early 2000s, increasing recognition of the potential of new communications technologies to allow for a plethora of media voices led to pressure to lift ownership regulations, in particular the cross-media ownership rules. By the late 1990s, John Howard was on record as saying that the cross-media rules were outdated (Cunningham, 1997). Lindsay Tanner (1999) wrote in his book Open Australia that ‘the information technology revolution’ would end the ‘media dominance of newspapers and television’. Tanner argued that diversity and competition in media should be promoted through competition law and subsidisation rather than direct regulation: ‘Provided that the emergence of new media is fostered by government it no longer matters much whether or not Kerry Packer owns Fairfax.’ (1999: 175–76)

In 2000, the Productivity Commission criticised the restrictions on foreign ownership and control in particular as being anti-competitive. It considered that the rules were not consistent, and that commercial radio and television services should be treated equitably. Loosening the rules would improve access to capital, increase the pool of potential media proprietors and act as an safeguard against media concentration (Productivity Commission, 2000: 340).

Accordingly, in 2002, the Howard government moved to change the rules. Its Bill – allowing companies to own two kinds of commercial television, commercial radio or print media service in any market – was, however, rejected by the Senate. The 2004 federal election then resulted in the Howard government controlling both the House of Representatives and the Senate, enabling it to secure the passage of legislation without minor party support (Given, 2007). In 2005, DCITA stated publicly that ‘the government [is] committed to reform cross-media ownership and media specific foreign ownership restrictions in the BSA’ (DCITA, 2005).

In October 2006, parliament passed the Broadcasting Services Amendment (Media Ownership) Act 2006, relaxing the cross-media laws and removing all limits on foreign ownership. It received Royal Assent on 4 November 2006, with different aspects coming into effect on 1 February and 4 April 2007. The new rules permit cross-media mergers in radio licence areas where sufficient diversity of media groups remains following the merger. At least five separate media groups are required to remain after any merger activity in mainland state capitals and four groups in regional licence areas. No media merger

25

No. 140 — August 2011

– including one that is not a cross-media merger – will be permitted if it would reduce the number of media groups in a licence area below the minimum level (Senate, 2006).

Table 1: Media ownership rules affecting commercial radio and commercial television licensees in Australia

Pre-1987 1987–2006 Post-2006

Number of licences

Commercial TV limited to two licences. Commercial radio limited to six licences.

Commercial TV limited to 75 per cent national reach, one licence in any one licence area. Commercial radio limited to two licences in any one licence area and no national reach limit.

No change. Multi- channels allow three digital services per licence per licence area for commercial TV.

Reach Audience reach limited by geography determined by transmitter power output. No obligation to serve licence area.

No change.

Foreign control

Up to 1981 – owners must be Australian residents; after 1981 – owners must be Australian citizens

Foreign control limited to 15 per cent for an individual and 20 per cent cumulative for commercial TV licences. No limits for commercial radio.

No practical restriction (general foreign ownership policies apply).

Cross- media control

No restrictions on the ownership of a combination of newspapers, TV and radio in the same market.

No cross-media ownership between radio, television and newspapers in a licence area, beyond 15 per cent.

For commercial radio, there must be at least four different voices in regional licence areas and at least five in metro areas (the four/five rule). A person may not control more than two media out of radio, TV and newspapers in a licence area (the two- out-of-three rule).

Other Owners must be fit and proper persons

Note: Although commercial radio and television licences are associated with a defined licence area, newspapers are not, so the rules attribute a newspaper to a broadcasting area if 50 per cent of its circulation is within that area. National newspapers only have a small share of the market in each licence area, so they are not affected by the rules. Newspapers in languages other than English, papers published fewer than four days per week and magazines are also excluded from the rules (Armstrong et al., 1995). Sources: ACMA (2009); MEAA (2002).

At the same time, the federal government directed the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) to provide guidance as to how future cross-media merger proposals might be assessed under the Trade Practices Act and how it would define media

26

Media International Australia

markets. The ACCC previously had recognised the media as four separate markets: free- to-air television, pay television, radio and print. However, technological convergence had blurred these traditional boundaries, and different media were now competing directly for their users’ leisure time and discretionary expenditure:

In competing for audience share, the media were also increasingly competing for content. Given the structural and technological uncertainties in the media market, the ACCC envisaged availability of content – including news, information and opinion – would become one of the key issues in assessing a media merger. (ACCC, 2006)

And so it was that economic policy – and more specifically competition policy – priorities determined the shape and scope of these structural changes. Only the ACCC acknowledged that the supply of content to consumers and other, within the media should be an important consideration in assessing the validity of a merger. Even then, changes that originally were proposed as an enhancement of the public interest were set within an economic frame that treated it as a secondary issue, a market externality, a product of corporate jostling for audience share and advertising revenues.

Anticipating the fallout Debate about the 2006 media law changes clustered in two groups. Many academics were concerned that lifting the media ownership laws inevitably would result in a loss of diversity in Australia, predicting that Kerry Packer or Rupert Murdoch would be primed to take over Fairfax. The business press, on the other hand, considered that the effect of the change could be minimal.

Academics tended to see the cross-media rules as an important stop-gap, preventing the major players from building media monopolies. As early as 2000, in response to the Productivity Commission inquiry, Cunningham and Romano (2000: 21) argued that there was no evidence to support the argument that cross-media rules were irrelevant in a world of new media outlets: ‘most of the evidence points to powerful media players moving effectively to tie up new media’. The debate surrounding the proposed new rules included predictions that the proposed changes would entrench the old regimes, and protect them into the future. For example:

The danger is that removing the cross media laws at this stage is likely to exacerbate the problem it is claimed it will solve – increasing media diversity at a time of great technological change … If [the big companies] do get bigger they stand to have a chilling effect on the whole sector, to kill many new ventures before they even start because the game looks too tough. (Schultz, 2005: 3)

The proposed changes are a recipe for further concentration, not greater diversity in the Australian media. They will encourage media companies to think about acquisition rather than innovation, about consolidation of old media rather than creativity with new, about buying their way into a cross-platform future, rather than using the exciting technologies already available to them, which are untouched by cross-media restrictions – broadband and mobile. (Given, 2006: n.p.)

Empirical data at the time also suggested the proposed changes would be unlikely to increase media diversity. Downie and Macintosh (2006) found that only a small proportion of Australians relied on the internet for news and current affairs, and those who did used websites controlled either directly or indirectly through content supplied by traditional media owners.

Even the government was predicting that the rules would lead to consolidation. In July 2005, before the release of the proposed rules, Minister for Communications Helen Coonan suggested that new cross-media rules would limit the number of large companies that

27

No. 140 — August 2011

may operate in each market (Shoebridge and Crowe, 2005). The prime minister himself said that in a small media market such as Australia’s, ‘a certain concentration is needed’ (Maiden and Ricketson, 2006). As the laws were put in place, some in the industry were predicting consolidation:

The media proprietors are the major driver behind the decision to reform the existing rules. They stand to benefit greatly from the changes and have been pushing for them for the better part of 15 years. (‘Media reforms threaten diversity’, 2006)

A spokesman for News Limited, publisher of The Australian, said last night the package ‘won’t deliver the intended benefits to consumers and will simply lead to industry consolidation among entrenched players who won’t have any incentive to drive digital take-up’. (Tabakoff, 2007)

A second, albeit smaller, group of commentators – including many in the business press – thought that any drastic changes were unlikely. Although there was a flurry of takeover activity and financial re-engineering as the rule changes passed parliament, none of these deals was dependent on the new laws. John Roskam of the Institute of Public Affairs, a conservative think-tank, thought that the ‘practical changes produced by the laws would be minimal’ (Roskam, 2007). Some doubted whether new value could be found in traditional media, minimising any likely interest in new acquisitions:

The market is looking for growth but is unlikely to find it in traditional media. Most media stocks are already fully priced thanks to talk of ownership changes, US markets show little evidence of worthwhile synergies between broadcasters and publishers, and medium-term revenue growth from established products is little better than bond rates. (Burton and Murray, 2006: 3)

Two crucial points emerge from this debate. First, many thought the new, loosened rules would lead to an increase in media ownership concentration, albeit in a different pattern. Second, the debate seemed to ignore the justifying social and political principles of the ownership rules – namely, to foster the quality and diversity of content offered to the Australian public. The debate abandoned or ignored the earlier working assumption of the reformers that diversity of ownership should be an effective proxy for quality of output. It changed key from an emphasis on what the public should be able to see, hear and read to how the markets might work.

What happened? To examine objectively how the 2006 rule changes affected ownership concentration, this study acquired ownership and control details for commercial radio and commercial television services and newspapers affected by the rules for 2003 and 2007 – corresponding with the AuSSA survey months – and for 2010 to examine longer-term effects of the rule changes. The study is limited to commercial radio and television services and to ‘associated newspapers’, as these are the services affected by the cross-media rules.3 The 2003 data were sourced from the Communications Law Centre’s semi-regular Media Ownership Update, published as part of its now discontinued journal Communications Update (Communications Law Centre, 2003). The 2007 data were extracted from ACMA’s July 2007 current controllers’ report and the 2010 data from ACMA’s Media Control Database in April 2010.4

The ownership data show evidence of increased media concentration following the rule changes, with the number of controllers decreasing for all media types over the study period (Table 2).5 These decreases occurred despite the auction of new commercial radio and television licences: government released nine new commercial radio licences and two new commercial television licences between 2003 and 2007 (Table 3).

28

Media International Australia

The number of different media services owned by each business group also shows evidence of investment diversification (see Appendix for data tables). Larger groups have taken advantage of the rule changes to diversify their holdings, even though the rules may have forced them to shed existing assets. For example, Macquarie Media (now Macquarie Southern Cross) acquired commercial radio licences from DMG, which it then sold on after acquiring the commercial television licences previously held by Southern Cross Broadcasting (Appendix). Smaller media organisations, including Super Radio Network and Prime Radio, have in turn acquired these commercial radio licences, expanding their networks.

Paradoxically, then, the changes to the cross-media rules have resulted in larger media organisations reducing and diversifying media holdings, and some smaller organisations increasing licence holdings as they pick up licences under forced sales.

Table 2: Number of controllers of media services, all of Australia, 2003–10

Number of controllers of media services 2003 2007 2010 Commercial radio 33 34 32 Commercial television 9 8 7 Associated newspapers 13 8 8

Sources: ACMA (2007, 2010c); Communications Law Centre (2003).

Table 3: Number of media services, all of Australia, 2003-10

Number of media services 2003 2007 2010 Commercial radio 253 262 262 Commercial television 53 55 55 Associated newspapers 47 47 47

Sources: ACMA (2007, 2010c); Communications Law Centre (2003).

how did this happen? Despite the many predictions that Kerry Packer or Rupert Murdoch would take over Fairfax, the most significant changes following the rule changes were unanticipated by commentators: the emergence of the private equity fund as a media financing vehicle, Fairfax’s merger with Rural Press and Kerry Stokes’ effective takeover of West Australian Newspapers.

In October 2006, Senate approval of the new laws was a catalyst for a rush of strategic moves. On the same day the laws were approved, James Packer announced that he had sold half of his media business to the private equity group CVC Capital Partners. The following day, Kerry Stokes’ Seven Network acquired a 14.9 per cent per cent stake in West Australian Newspapers. By the end of the week, News had acquired a ‘friendly’ 7.5 per cent stake in Fairfax. In December, Seven shareholders approved a joint venture with private equity group Kohlberg Kravis Roberts, freeing $3.2 billion cash, with Seven then acquiring a 3 per cent stake in Fairfax Media. Macquarie Media then took a 14.9 per cent holding in Southern Cross Broadcasting. Despite their timing, all of these deals were structured under the old rules. Only Kerry Stokes’ acquisitions appeared to be intended to take advantage of the new rules (Day, 2006; Maiden et al., 2006; Maiden and Ricketson, 2006; Murray, 2006; Schulze and Maiden, 2006).

Possibly the most significant change resulting from the new rules was the merger between Fairfax and Rural Press in May 2007. Most analysts had predicted that Fairfax ‘would be swallowed by one of the predators in the media pit’. Instead, the merger created ‘the largest print and online media company in Australasia’ (Ricketson, 2007). Along with

29

No. 140 — August 2011

Rural Press’s nine newspaper titles, the merger brought seven commercial radio licences under the control of Fairfax Media. By mid-2007, Fairfax had acquired an additional three regional newspaper titles, removing five companies from ACMA’s list of controllers of associated newspapers (Appendix).

The next major ownership change was triggered in July 2007 by Fairfax and Macquarie Media’s takeover of Southern Star, which owned Southern Cross Broadcasting. Macquarie Media had previously acquired DMG’s regional radio network and RG Capital Radio. At the time, Macquarie controlled more commercial radio licences – 85 – than any other business in Australia. Its regional radio networks were ubiquitous in some areas of eastern Australia, with areas of Queensland, Tasmania and Victoria receiving blanket Macquarie- controlled radio services. To comply with the new rules, the takeover forced Macquarie to divest some of its radio network. Fairfax was also forced to sell a commercial radio licence. Beneficiaries of the divestments included: • Grant Broadcasters, which acquired nine commercial radio licences from Macquarie

and one from Fairfax • Smart Radio Group, which acquired three Macquarie licences in regional Queensland

to add to its existing Charleville licences • Resonate Broadcasting, a new licensee, which acquired three Macquarie licences, two

in regional Queensland and one in regional Victoria • Coastal Broadcasters, which acquired a Macquarie commercial radio licence in regional

Queensland to add to its two existing licences • Super Radio Network, which acquired two Macquarie commercial radio licences in

regional New South Wales to add to its significant regional New South Wales radio network. The other significant ownership change during this period was Kerry Stokes’ takeover of

West Australian Newspapers, which owned the regional Western Australian radio network Redwave Network and the West Australian newspaper. Stokes effectively gained control over WAN without launching a formal takeover bid and paying a premium to buy out existing shareholders – an approach similar to the one he used to take over Seven in the 1990s. He slowly acquired shares under the ‘creep’ provisions of the Corporations Act 2001, applying pressure to obtain two seats on WAN’s board. The takeover is not reflected in ACMA’s controller database, as the assets did not move between companies, nor did it force any further licence sales to ensure compliance with the ownership rules.

Conclusions From 1987 to the present, changes in the regulation of media have been an integral part of the process of economic reform. Accordingly, to arrive at a balanced understanding of the significance of the effects of the 2006 cross-media rules, they need to be assessed both within their own terms as micro-economic reforms and as means of achieving larger social and public benefits.

Clearly there has been a shake-up. The new rules allowed established players to reposition themselves across media for the first time since 1987. By late 2010, three years after the laws came into effect, we could reasonably conclude that the industry had settled into a new ownership pattern and that the 2006 cross-media rules had forced a degree of change within the ownership structures of the Australian media industry. Our headline finding is that the ownership of commercial radio and commercial television services and associated newspapers has become more concentrated, with fewer companies holding mass-media assets. This is not, however, a simple finding of contracting media voices: • Larger companies have diversified their holdings, investing across the media. As

diversification under the new rules forced some companies to divest some media

30

Media International Australia

assets, larger media organisations now tend to control fewer media businesses than under the 1987 rules.

• Many smaller companies increased their holdings of commercial radio licences, as larger organisations shed their networks in favour of diversified media investments.

Who owns heritage media continues to matter. New media have not been nurtured to balance the lifting of the cross-media rules, as advocated by Lindsay Tanner. Although the growth of new media has dramatically increased the number of viewpoints presented to the public, heritage companies continue to dominate the online space. Very few online voices have a significant enough following to challenge the influence of traditional media on public opinion (Holmes, 2007; Papandrea, 2010). Big advertisers continue to favour the traditional media – in 2009, 81 per cent of advertising expenditure in Australia went to radio, television and newspapers (ACMA, 2010b).

Service to the regions was always an important consideration in the design of the new rules, with different rules applying to non-metropolitan areas. The rules, however limit the scope for competition from newer and smaller operators, as they encourage media businesses to centralise news and information services. As networked services are homogenised across media and regions, the needs of specific communities are bleached out in generic offerings and lost in lowest common denominator programming. Despite ACMA content rules ensuring coverage of local news and current affairs, evidence points to smaller networks struggling to meet these requirements. In May 2010, for example, the ABC’s Media Watch reported that Southern Cross Media prepared news reports for nineteen regional television services in its Canberra studio and, further, that because it was ‘too busy’ it missed a local news story about a siege that had resulted in the evacuation of 100 homes. In the same program, Media Watch reported that Prime News pre-recorded many of its regional news bulletins, including Monday morning news updates being recorded on the preceding Friday (Holmes, 2010). Such effects entrench new forms of market failure and work against the interests of both citizens and consumers.

As the AuSSA data show, the concentration of media ownership resulting from the new cross-media rules runs counter to the wishes of most Australians. Although the BSA was intended to ensure balance between the economic and social objectives of broadcasting regulation, the new ownership rules place an increased emphasis on market forces. The main beneficiaries of the rule changes appear to be the media owners, with the public interest merely treated as an economic externality.

This discussion is timely. In June 2010, ACMA released two occasional papers, one exploring concepts of the citizen in media regulation, and the other addressing optimal conditions for self- and co-regulation of the media (ACMA, 2010a, 2010d). ACMA’s examination of the role of the citizen derived in part from a ‘whole-of-government reform’, a priority that itself was part of the push for an across-the-board economic restructuring of Australian society. ACMA was also driven – significantly – by an increasing recognition that the role of the individual in society was not reducible to ideas of private interest and economic right. While ACMA explores the balance between the interests of citizens and consumers, the problems of centralising newsrooms revealed by the Media Watch show how a simple change to the cross-media rules had unintended and adverse consequences, allowing media owners to reduce services in regional areas.

From the outset, the new ownership rules were, in part, swept into a 25-year-long tide of neo-liberal economic reform, a ‘top down re-engineering of a whole nation society’ (Pusey, 2003). With respect to media reform in particular, the distorting reduction of citizen interests to free market imperatives has had much to do, as we have suggested, with Australia’s traditionally weak concepts of civil society and our under-developed notions of participatory democracy and democratic governance. This has been abetted further by the fragility of public service broadcasting in the face of aggressively asserted private interests, most notably the interests of the big media proprietors, big advertisers and most

31

No. 140 — August 2011

recently holding companies and private equity funds. In many respects, economic reform has captured and buried a much older Australian tradition of reliance on the pragmatic problem-solving and regulatory powers of state instrumentalities (commissions, royal commissions, statutory authorities, tribunals, public experts and senior public servants) to further our collective interests. Such institutions as the CSIRO, the ABC and more recently the SBS broadcasting service were all brought to life and succoured by this older tradition. It is little surprise, then, that ‘fourth estate’ values, editorial independence and the larger priorities of moderate democratic governance largely have been subordinated to a pressure for market deregulation that has advantaged private against public interests and the interests of the citizen against those of the consumer.

Notes 1 ‘Liberal’ here loosely means ‘small l’ liberal or even socially progressive — not ‘neo-liberal’. 2 The AuSSA survey also showed that television, radio and print media continued to be the most

important sources of news and current affairs for the majority of Australians: in 2007, only about 6 per cent of respondents relied on the internet for news and information.

3 A newspaper is an associated newspaper if at least 50 per cent of its circulation is within a commercial radio licence area or a commercial television licence area. It must be in English and published on at least four days in each week, and 50 per cent of its circulation must be by way of sale.

4 ACMA’s Media Control Database draws information from a variety of sources including: notifications under Part 5 of the BSA; the Associated Newspaper Register maintained under section 59 of the BSA; and the Register of Controlled Media Groups maintained under section 61AU of the BSA.

5 Joint ventures are attributed proportionally to each partner organisation. That is, if two organisations own or control a media service, this study assumes that each partner controls half a service.

References ACCC 2006, Media Mergers, ACCC, Sydney. ACMA 2007, Current Controllers: 2 July 2007, ACMA, Sydney. —— 2009, Media Reform: Key Concepts Relating to Media Ownership in the 2006 Amendments

to the Broadcasting Services Act 1992, ACMA, Sydney. —— 2010a, ‘Citizens’ and the ACMA: Exploring the Concepts Within Australian Media and

Communications Regulation, ACMA, Sydney. —— 2010b, Communications Report 2009–10, ACMA, Sydney. —— 2010c, Media Control Database, http://web.acma.gov.au/rcmg/mcdIndex.htm. —— 2010d, Optimal Conditions for Effective Self- and Co-regulation, ACMA, Sydney. Armstrong, M., Lindsay, D. and Watterson, R. 1995, Media Law in Australia, Oxford University

Press, Melbourne. Brown, A. and Cave, M. 1992, ‘The Economics of Television Regulation: A Survey with Application

to Australia’, The Economic Record, no. 68, pp. 377–94. Burton, T. and Murray, L. 2006, ‘Hard to Know How Australia’s Media Story will Pan Out’,

The Age, 27 February, p. 3. Communications Law Centre 2003, Communications Update. Couldry, N., Livingstone, S. and Markham, T. 2007, Media Consumption and Public Engagement:

Beyond the Presumption of Attention, Palgrave Macmillan, London. Cunningham, S. 1997, ‘Influences on the Idea of Media “Influence”’, Metro, no. 111, pp. 31–34. Cunningham, S. and Romano, A. 2000, ‘W(h)ither media influence?’, Media International Australia,

no. 95, pp. 19–27. Day, M. 2006, ‘Frenzy of Activity Before Reforms’, The Australian, 14 December, p. 14. DCITA 2005, Review of Australian and New Zealand Content on Subscription Television Broadcasting

Services: Report, DCITA, Canberra. DOTAC 1993, A New Approach to Regulation – Broadcasting Reform, DOTAC, Canberra. Downie, C. and Macintosh, A. 2006, New Media or More of the Same? The Cross-Media Ownership

Debate, Australia Institute, Canberra.

32

Media International Australia

Doyle, G. 2000, ‘The Economics of Monomedia and Cross-Media Expansion: A Study of the Case Favouring Deregulation of TV and Newspaper Ownership in the UK’, Journal of Cultural Economics, no. 24, pp. 1–26.

Given, J. 2006, Meeting the Digital Challenge: Reforming Australia’s Media in the Digital Age – Response to Discussion Paper, www.networkinsight.org/verve/_resources/CPRF_2010_papers.pdf.

—— 2007, ‘Cross-Media Ownership Laws: Refinement or Rejection?’, UNSW Law Journal, no. 30, pp. 258–68.

Hallin, D.C. and Mancini, P. 2004, Comparing Media Systems: Three Models of Media and Politics, Cambridge University Press, Melbourne.

Henningham, J. 1996, ‘Australian Journalists’ Professional and Ethical Values’, Journalism and Mass Communication Quarterly, no. 73, pp. 206–18.

Holmes, D. 2007, ‘Consumers are Big Losers in Coonan’s Media Shake-up’, The Age, 13 April, p. 8. Holmes, J. 2010, ‘Old News is Cheap News, No News is Cheaper’, Media Watch, ABC TV, 31 May. Jones, P. and Pusey, M. 2008, ‘Political Communication and Media Systems’, Media Culture and

Society, no. 32, pp 451–71. Maiden, M., Murray, L., Askew, K., Murphy, K., Evans, M., Grattan, M. and Westerman, H. 2006,

‘Game on for Media Carve-up’, The Age, 18 October, p. 1. Maiden, M. and Ricketson, M. 2006, ‘The Hustlers’, The Age, 21 October, p. 1. McAllister, I., Wilkins, R. and Croissant, A. 2011, Sustainable Government Indicators 2011 –

Australia Report, Bertelsmann Stiftung, 27 July. Media Entertainment and Arts Alliance (MEAA) 2002, Submission to Senate Environment,

Communications, Information Technology and the Arts Legislation Committee on Media Ownership Bill.

‘Media Reforms Threaten Diversity’ 2006, The Canberra Times, 13 July. Murray, L. 2006, ‘Seven Backers Tick Funding for $4b Deal’, Sydney Morning Herald,

23 December, p. 54. Norris, P. 2003, A Virtuous Circle: Political Communications in Postindustrial Societies, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge. Papandrea, F. 2010, ‘Deregulation and Concentration in Electronic Media’, Communications Research

and Policy Forum, Sydney, 15–16 November. Pearson, M. and Brand, J. 2001, Sources of News and Current Affairs, ABA, Sydney. Productivity Commission 2000, Broadcasting, Report no. 11, AusInfo, Canberra. Pusey, M. 2003, ‘An Australian Story: The Troubling Experience of Economic Reform, Lecture to

the Senate’, Parliament House, Canberra, 20 June. Ricketson, M. 2007, ‘Hunted Turns Predator in the Media Mix’, The Age, 3 July, p. 1. Roskam, J. 2007, ‘The ABC is Not Doing Its Job’, The Age, 11 April, p. 15. Schultz, J. 1998, Reviving the Fourth Estate: Democracy, Accountability & the Media, Cambridge

University Press, Melbourne. —— 2005, ‘A More Diverse Media: Can the Club Be Busted?’ in Fabian Society (ed.), Another

Lost Generation, Parliament House, Sydney. Schulze, J. and Maiden, S. 2006, ‘News Takes Shock Stake in Fairfax’, The Australian, 20 October,

p. 1. Senate 2006, Broadcasting Services Amendment (Media Ownership) Bill 2006 Explanatory

Memorandum. Shoebridge, N. and Crowe, D. 2005, ‘Coonan Dilutes Media Changes’, Australian Financial Review,

27 July, p. 6. Tanner, L. 1999, Open Australia, Pluto Press, Sydney. Tiffen, R. and Gittens, R. 2009, How Australia Compares, Cambridge University Press, Melbourne. Wilson, S., Meagher, G., Gibson, R., Denemark, D. and Western, M. (eds) 2005, Australian Social

Attitudes: The First Report, UNSW Press, Sydney. Withers, G. 2003, ‘Economics and Regulation of Broadcasting’, in R. Towse (ed.), Handbook of

Cultural Economics, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, pp. 102–13.

Michael Pusey is a Professor of Sociology at Macquarie University and Professor Emeritus at the University of New South Wales.

Marion McCutcheon is a Research Fellow with the Institute of Social Research at Swinburne University of Technology.

33

No. 140 — August 2011

Appendix Table 4: Number of commercial radio services by controller, all of Australia, 2003–10

Organisation 2003 2007 2010 2KY 1 1 1 3UZ 2 2 2 ACE Radio 12 13 13 Alice Springs Commercial Broadcasters 2 2 2 Associated Media Investments 8 1 Austereo Network 10 10 10 Australian Radio Network 8 8 8 Beecher Investments 2 Camplin Group 2 2 2 Capital Radio Network 6 3 1 Coastal Broadcasters 2 2 3 DMG Radio 61 8 8 Fairfax Media 9 15 Flow FM 2 2 2 Geraldton Newspapers 2 Grant Broadcasters 15 18 28 Hits Radio 2 2 JV Austereo Network; Australian Radio Network 2 2 2 JV Austereo Group; RG Capital Radio 2 JV Australian Radio Network; DMG Radio 2 2 2 JV Camplin Broadcasters; Capital Radio Network 1 1 JV Capital Radio Network/Grant Broadcasters 1 2 4 JV Macquarie Southern Cross/Austereo Network 2 2 Macquarie Radio Network 2 2 2 Macquarie Southern Cross 85 67 Media Corporation Australia 2 2 2 North East Broadcasters 4 4 4 Pacific Star Network 2 2 2 Prime Radio 8 10 Queensland Media Investment 1 Radio Outback 4 4 2 Radio Snowy Mountains 2 3 Rebel Radio Network 2 2 2 RG Capital Radio 34 Redwave Network (WAN) 6 9 9 Resonate Broadcasting 3 Robert Nettlefold 1 Rural Press 7 Smart Radio Group 2 2 5 Southern Cross Broadcasting 7 7 Super Radio Network 30 32 36 The Hot Tomato Broadcasting Company 1 1 1

34

Media International Australia

Tote Tasmania 1 1 1 Unitab 1 2 2 West Coast Radio 2 2 2 WIN Media 2 2 2 Sources: ACMA (2007, 2010c); Communications Law Centre (2003).

Table 5: Number of commercial television services by controller, all of Australia, 2003–10

Organisation 2003 2007 2010 Imparja TV 1 1 1 JV Nine Network/Southern Cross Broadcasting 1 JV Southern Cross Broadcasting; WIN Corp 1 1 JV WIN Media/Prime Television 1 3 JV Nine Network/Macquarie Southern Cross 1 JV WIN Media/Macquarie Southern Cross 1 Macquarie Southern Cross 12 Network Ten 5 5 5 Nine Network 4 5 5 Prime Television 8 8 7 Seven Network 6 6 6 Southern Cross Broadcasting (Australia) 14 14 Sunraysia Television 1 1 Washington H Soul Pattinson & Co 1 WIN Media 12 12 14

Sources: ACMA (2007, ACMA, 2010c), Communications Law Centre (2003).

Table 6: Number of associated newspapers by controller, all of Australia, 2003–10 Organisation 2003 2007 2010 APN News & Media 13 13 13 Barrier Trades and Labour Council 1 1 1 Carpentaria Newspapers 1 Elliot Newspaper Group 1 1 1 Harris & Co 1 Fairfax Media 5 18 18 McPherson Media 1 1 1 News Limited 10 10 10 Riverina Media Group 1 Rural Press 9 The Border Morning Mail 1 The Border Watch 1 1 1 West Australian Newspapers 2 2 2

Sources: ACMA (2007, 2010c); Communications Law Centre (2003).

Copyright of Media International Australia (8/1/07-current) is the property of Media International Australia

(MIA) and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the

copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for

individual use.

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._From Media Moguls to Money Men - Media Concentrations In Australia.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/MasterChefs Amateur Makeovers.pdf

Kirsten Seale

MASTERCHEPS AMATEUR MAKEOVERS

Abstract The media industries are becoming increasingly reliant on amateur labour, and Australia's highest rating television program, MasterChef Australia, is no exception. The show's grand narrative of 'making over ' home cooks into professionals is at odds with its calculatedly ambivalent representation and deployment of the trope of the amateur. This article proposes that MasterChef is instead invested in deferring the attainment of professional status so as to ensure the continued provision of inexpensive labour and content provided by amateurs.

In 2009 and 2010, MasterChef Australia was the highest rating television event on national television. The show's popularity with a public acculturated to two decades of prime-time lifestyle and reality television is not surprising. In a media market saturated by multiple permutations of the cooking show tbe show's novelty - if it could be called that - is tbat it hybridises and amplifies a number of the lifestyle and reality genres already ubiquitous in Australian television programming. Above all, MasterChef activates the 'makeover' genre in its central narrative of transforming amateur cooks into professionals.

Amateurism is instmmental in tbe show's success among viewers. It implies ordinariness which, in one articulation of what Graeme Tumer (2009) has termed 'the demotie tum', has become tbe primary mode of address deployed by reality television genres to interpellate and mobilise an audience of 'ordinary' consumers. Yet MasterChef s grand narrative of 'making over' bome eooks into professionals is curiously at odds with its calculatedly ambivalent stmctural and representational reification of amateur labour. MasterChef \s, in fact, invested in postponing the attainment of professional status. This regulated deferral has two interconnected objectives: it maintains a regime of labour 'protectionism' for those who are already professionals; and it perpetuates the economy of amateur labour and content-provision on which the media industries are becoming increasingly dependent.

In his short essay 'The Political Economy of Amateurism', Andrew Ross singles out reality television as exemplary of the 'ongoing restmcturing of the creative industries' (2009: 136) and the concomitant reliance on the skills and producfion of unpaid and under- paid workers. To gauge its prevalence in Australian schedules, reality television (which in this survey incorporates the lifestyle and infotainment genres) constituted 19 per cent of free-to-air programming in the state of Victoria in 2009-10 (Film Victoria, 2010). For Ross, it is imperative that media studies and associated disciplines:

start analyzing how it is that contemporary media, or the so-called creative industries, have emerged as an optimum field for realizing the longstanding capitalist dream of stripping labor costs to tbe bone. If, in addition, consumers are now willingly building the product and bumishing the brand, where does that leave the progressive dream of a cooperative media economy? (2009: 137)

I do not want to suggest that MasterChef is produced 'on the cheap'; on the contrary, its obvious high production values speak otherwise. Rather, MasterChefs use and representation

Media Internationai Australia

28

of amateurs ideologically matches institutionalised practice across the media industries (Andrejevic, 2011). I therefore want to extend Ross' critique by arguing that the trope of amateurism, as it is exercised in the show, serves a directed purpose.

Before I continue, I would like to define the parameters of my use of the term 'amateur'. An amatetir is someone who rehearses the professional - that is to say, their skills and their training might approach that of a professional, but they are not compensated as such. An exemplar of this would be American college football, which is as big if not bigger than the professional game, and is performed on the same scale and with the same intensity, yet the players are not remunerated financially. They benefit in other ways that are in effect monetised - for instance, the receipt of free tuition - but overall it is the potential of 'exposure' and a pay cheque at some tinspecified later date that is the incentive within this economy. A state of deferral or postponement is a crucial mechanism in the commercial appropriation and exploitation of amateur labour.

Learning to be ordinary One iteration of makeover television's ambivalent movement between nominally oppositional modes and spaces such as amateur and professional is the representation and enactment of what Tania Lewis calls 'ordinary expertise' (2008: 3). In this context, 'ordinary' is polyvalent. It denotes everyday, often domestic practices such as DIY home improvements, gardening, handicrafts, grooming and cooking. 'Ordinariness' also denotes the register and performance of the address, as well as the on- and off-screen publics to which the expert advice is addressed (Tumer, 2009; Bonner, 2003). MasterChef succsssMly promulgates the discourse of ordinariness, as the winner of the 2009 series Julie Goodwin acknowledged when she described the show as 'not about the glamorous world of showbiz or fashion, but about the seemingly mundane, decidedly unglamorous and messy task of cooking' (Kroenert, 2009b). Goodwin was only telling half the story because the mundane, or ordinary, is not sufficient in itself: in MasterChef the amateur cook is consistently situated in relation to the professional cook, who is fiirther exceptionalised through the figure of the celebrity chef. This relational positioning is a generic tendency of makeover television, as Guy Redden elaborates:

The ordinariness at stake is better thought of as a kind of layperson status. Members of the public are shown going about their everyday lives. Their televisual interest is predicated on their initial lack of qualification or complete competence in some aspect of life, and it is this that warrants intervention ... Experts act as counsellors, assisting their clients in fulfilling their stated desires. In the course of this their superior professional knowledge in matters of taste and behaviour is redistributed to the participants, and by extension to the viewing population as a whole. (2008: 129)

The expert's role in the makeover process is to teach what Pierre Bourdieu (2003) terms 'cultural competence'. Bourdieu is talking about the social construction of taste in art, but his notion nevertheless resonates here, given MasterChef s preoccupation with the cultural capital of food. Bourdieu writes: 'Consumption is, in this case, a stage in a process of communication, that is, an act of deciphering, decoding, which presupposes practical or explicit mastery of a cipher or a code ... A work ... has meaning and interest only for someone who possesses the cultural competence, that is, the code, into which it is encoded.' (2003: 2)

It is the expert who is the gatekeeper of this code, yet the very act of imparting the key to that code endangers the privileged position of the expert. The transformative success of the makeover implies the redundancy of the expert. With amateurs and professionals circulating within the same economy of labour, there is a great deal at stake because

No. 143 —May 2012

29

it is a question of livelihoods, which might explain the frequent lack of completeness in the makeover that Frances Bonner detects: 'ordinary people are seen as needing instmcting again and again and the expertise which is passed on each week, supposedly diminishing the distance between amateur and professional, evaporates by the beginning of the subsequent sbow' (2003: 133). This protecfionism is also apparent in MasterChefs almost total omission of food bloggers, a significant - mostly amateur - constituency of the food/media assemblage in which the show is a node. The inclusion of food blogger Billy Law in the 2011 series is a recognition of this community, yet his participation as a contestant, and not a judge, firmly delineates his affiliation with the amateur.

MasterChef \izaQS on the popularity of food programming, a popularity that is partially explained by tbe notion of 'ordinariness'. Cooking is ubiquitous - we have all cooked or been cooked for. It is linked to eating, which is a basic, primal need. The existence of the cooking show goes beyond the human body's need for sustenance, and initially was motivated by pedagogy. Over time, that pedagogical function has diversified from educating viewers in specialist skills and knowledge to the more encompassing task of enrolling the viewer as consumer-citizen. In fact, the didactic eooking demonstration, which facilitates later reproduction of the dish, is peripheral to other types of cultural competence in MasterChef. Recipes are available online, or in tbe show's eponymous magazine, which encourages further consumption of the MasterChef brand through its multiple platforms. Even in the most explicitly pedagogical segment of the show, the weekly 'MasterClass', the audience is not actively acknowledged in the knowledge transfer from professional chef to amateur cook. The viewer is forced into the role of gastronomic voyeur in a scenario that is reminiscent of the one Rebecca Huntley describes in her 2007 report into the sociology of food in Australia:

In this country, a sharp contrast can be observed. On the one hand there is the brilliant food of celebrity cbefs exhibited in glossy food publications and engaging TV shows. Then there is ... the reliance of increasingly busy people on pre-packaged and pre-prepared food, and the evidence that we watch people cook more than we cook ourselves. (2007: 7)

The range of pre-prepared Thai sauees that 2010 contestant Marion Grasby was reported to be developing post-elimination also realises Huntley's schema (Clune, 2010). Grasby's entrepreneurial initiative sells a pre-prepared product to the second group through an aspirational image of the first group. However, I would argue that in its emphasis on the amateur cook, MasterChef occupies an interstitial space - much like the amateurs themselves - between tbe two food cultures tbat is more complex than Huntley's 'sharp contrast' allows. Huntley's more recent post-Mö.?ierC/!e/research on food consumption in Australia substantiates that the show has blurred the distinction (Ipsos, 2009) as reflected in increased sales of produce and equipment after they appear in the program, though it is not yet clear whether the spike in sales for pink ling fish and blow torches translates to sustained sales in the long term (Olding and Taffel, 2010). Increased demand for pheasant aside, the show's pivotal narrative of pedagogy is not educating viewers on how to eook; rather, it represents the transformation of amateurism into professionalism as an aspirational trajectory of education.

Prime time for cooks Rachel Moseley identifies 'the make-over show, with its origins in women's magazines and daytime television [as] the most visible marker' (2001: 32) of what she calls the 'daytime-ization' of prime-time television during the 1990s. By 'daytime-ization', Moseley means the process where shows that traditionally were the province of daytime television:

Media International Australia

30

spaces and discourses conventionally gendered as 'feminine' - the personal, the private, the everyday - have been opened up to men in the programming of the [prime-time] slot, especially around care of the self through grooming, shopping and cookery. There are significant negotiations at work around gender, genre and aesthetics in the transformation of these spaces ... (2001: 32)

It is important to note that the 'daytime-ization' of prime time may open up the everyday to a wider audience, yet it is not a literal transposition; rather, it represents a version of the everyday that has been made over through an aestheticisation of the banal (Bourdieu, 2003: 5). In the MasterChef studio, the domestic kitchen is spectacularised as a foodie's fantasy, well stocked with expensive specialty produce such as tmffles and lobster, and equipped with gadgets to aid in every form of food preparation and all kinds of culinary techniques. Many exemplary figures in contemporary food programming - Nigella Lawson and Jamie Oliver included - take the stage in what purports to be a domestic kitchen, but is actually more approximate to the professional kitchen with its level of order, the absence of mess and the sophistication of its equipment. (In the case of Lawson's show, this Iiminal space is a simulacrum of her own kitchen, reproduced in a studio.) The simultaneous exaltation and marginalisation of the domestic kitchen in contemporary prime-time cooking shows obscures the fact that food programming that historically was confined to the 'feminised' space of daytime television was nevertheless presented within that context not as leisure but as serious - albeit unpaid - work, and thus worthy of significant expenditure of time and labour.

Another strategy of amplification in MasterChef, which has the effect of marginalising the gratuitous labour of the home cook, is moving cooking into the 'high-stakes' field of work. All of the contestants aspire to professionalise their home cooking. Many of the experts appearing on the show are male (celebrity) chefs who locate their cooking within the male-dominated professional domain, and therefore elide any unease about cooking being a gendered activity. Through the depiction of commercial cooking, as opposed to cooking a meal for the family, MasterChef legitimises and gives permission to male prime-time audiences for whom professionalism is judged more salient.

The male commentator below responded positively to the modification to the cooking show format in the original UK version:

My wife is a food aficionada. [The] all-cooking Lifestyle Food channel is, therefore, on often in my house. The programs don't generally appeal to me, although I reap the benefits at dinner time. There is one program which we discovered, and became hooked on, together. MasterChef is the pinnacle of reality TV ... It is compelling. A taut, high-stakes cooking competition ... These are real people - amateur cooks who dream of leaving behind their ordinary careers to become professional chefs. (Kroenert, 2009a)

The viewer quoted framed his attention to the cooking show with notions of work, gender and competition, while at the same time reinforcing that he was not interested in cooking or cooking programs per se. Above all, relocating the kitchen to the competitive world of work opens the show up to diverse viewing publics. The tactical success of introducing competition (which undoubtedly contains echoes of Australia's pervasive obsession with sport) in order to gain a wider range of viewing demographics is substantiated in the ratings: in the period since the OzTAM survey began in 2001, the sole program to out- rate MasterChefs 2010 finale was a sporting event, the 2005 Australian Open Men's Final (ABC, 2010).

No. 143 —May 2012

31

Aspirational cooking Despite the general tendency of critics in the mainstream media to disdain television genres that portray ordinary people (Tumer, 2009: 34), the Australian media's response to MasterChef was typically positive. Fairfax's Amanda Dunn celebrated the show's association with professionalism as a type of social realism:

[I]t taps into our anxieties and ambitions around work: the seductive idea of tossing in our day jobs and making a career out of something we really love. But whereas performing a hit single or nailing a Broadway dance routine is something most of us will never do, cooking dinner is as familiar as taking a shower. (2010)

Yet this allegedly realist narrative arc was the least convincing in the show. Much of the debate in the food industry surrounding the show's contribution to food culture in Australia were centred on the subject of professionalism, and the reaction to MasterChef s makeovers was mostly negative (Pawle, 2010). Celebrity chef Neil Perry, whose serial appearances on the show ostensibly lent credibility to the makeover narrative, was a non-believer, and stated (before later recanting) that the real 'pay-off' for the contestants was that nebulous slippery commodity: exposure. An article in the Daily Telegraph quoted Perry as saying:

If you leave MasterChef and think that you are now one of the great chefs of Australia, I think you are probably up for a pretty rough ride ... These people are just nobodies with very little experience and [aided by the show] are able to be exposed and have opportunities. That's why people go on the show. Most of them don't go on the show thinking they will be opening a restaurant ... most go on there to get enough media fame to be able to go on and do more media things. (Moran, 2010)

In the same piece, another chef also fi-amed the show's value in terms of exposure while pointing out that there was a disjuncture between the reality of the everyday work of mnning a restaurant and the program's unrealistic promotion of the amateurs, which was transmitted even in the show's title:

I've got a problem with the name. Essentially we're all cooks. Chef is French for leader, so what is a MasterCheß ... It devalues the stmggle that goes on every day of the week in a restaurant, to maintain costs, run staff, and to cook food in volume ... There's a lot of people who want to get on it. A lot of advertisers want to get on it, a lot of cooks and chefs. It's a profile thing now. If you're not on MasterChef, you're a bit second rate, aren't you? (Pawle, 2010)

The professional makeover in MasterChef fails to convince because it is primarily a tool for portraying the aspirational fantasy that any amateur who can do something proficiently has the potential to commodify their skills and knowledge. Amanda Dunn says:

At once accessible and aspirational ... the talent quest stream of reality TV plays on the romance of pure potential, the idea that an 'ordinary' person (i.e. you there in the lounge room) might have lurking within them a special talent that just needs nurturing under the stem but loving gaze of seasoned professionals, the masters to our grasshoppers. (2010)

The Oxford English Dictionary defines the verb 'aspire' thus: 'To have a fixed desire, longing, or ambition for something at present above one; to seek to attain, to pant, long.' To be aspirational in Australia is to be and do something more than merely aspire, and the class politics and significations of aspirationalism are far too complex to unpack in detail here. What I will say is that aspirationalism's objective is traced in a hierarchically

Media international Australia

32

linear pattern of social and economic mobility. The object is subordinate to the objective, which is the individuated and self-propelling drive to discard an inadequate 'before' for an augmented 'after'. The narrative of aspirationalism has a lot of structural overlap with the grand narrative of makeover television, which expends more time exhibiting the process than the outcome. Within these overlapping paradigms of self-improvement, what you are made over into matters less than the desire, or the 'experience' (Andrejevic, 2004: 143) of being made over. There is a compelling structural determinate for the emphasis on becoming: only a few tangibly benefit fi-om the makeover - there is only one victor in thé MasterChef kitchen - just as the rewards of aspirationalism are not guaranteed for all (Redden, 2008: 139).

Half-baked makeovers The process of 'daytime-ization' about which Moseley writes occurred in the 1990s, and prime-time audiences have become televisually acculturated to the formulation of ordinary expertise. In MasterChef, the drama of the makeover is driven not only by negotiations between ordinary and expert, but by negotiations between amateur and professional. MasterChef deploys to heightened effect a number of the spatial and discursive polarities along this latter axis that are specific to the production and consumption of amateur and professional food cultures. These include the unknown amateur and the celebrity chef; the comfort of home cooking and the forensic precision of molecular gastronomy; the hearth and the industrial burner of the three-hat restaurant.

In Series 1 and 2, a performative example of the show's ambivalent movement along this axis was the weekly 'Celebrity Chef Challenge', where a contestant and a celebrity chef both cooked the chef's 'signature' dish. The tension in the David and Goliath competition is generated fi-om the possibility that the amateur might better the professional, thus the task provides a visualisation of the makeover's progress. However, the amateur's victory is predicated upon vanquishing the professional, whose accomplishments are simultaneously the object of reverence and the target of destruction. In a 'kill your idols' moment, the amateur can transcend the professional chef only at the cost of the professional's status. It is a movement that upsets the trajectory of attainment and devalues the objective. Indeed, the very involvement of celebrity chefs is another means of recapitulating the authority of amateurism in that the renowned chef dedicates time to mentoring the hopeful untrained cook, thereby valorising their position.

The valorisation of the amateur - which is only allowed to take place once the amateur has acceded to an aspirational validation of the professional - produces and replicates associations with domesticity, home and family to suggest commercial disinterest. By relocating the kitchen to the competitive world of work, the show is opened up to diverse viewing publics (Lewis and Martin, 2010), yet in an inversion of Moseley's 'daytime- ization', which brought the domestic into prime time, prime time turns its gaze back on the domestic. In MasterChef, amateur cooking is indexical to a discourse about the authenticity and authority of self. Tumer (2009), as well as Anita Biressi and Heather Nurm (2005), observes that this 'selving' (Hill, 2005) device is at work in shows with a comparable competitive trajectory. Contestants are required to advertise 'ordinary' attributes connected to self in addition to their professional potential. Tumer writes:

Much of the participation in reality TV is aimed at a certain kind of recognition of the self Even though the contestants ... may be competing for the chance to be a successful singer, we fi-equently find them arguing their case to the judges in terms of their essential selves ... rather than in terms of their musical skills or abilities. (2009: 34)

No. 143 —May 2012

33

This tendency in MasterChef hus not gone unnoticed by commentators:

Part of its basic nature is the nurturing [cooking] enables - a thoughtful dish becomes a gift. It is instructive that when the contestants talk about what they love about cooking, it is in terms of the people they love ... One of the great things about the show is that it elevates making the evening meal, which can so easily descend into drudgery ... (Dunn, 2010)

Dutin may be commending what she interprets as an organic poetics of the quotidian, yet frequently the show manipulates situations to elicit references to home and family. The first challenge facing 2010's top 24 was to cook their fondest childhood food memory. Judge and mentor George Calombaris urged the contestants to 'put your heart on a plate', and at judging some were goaded into uncomfortable levels of emotional disclosure as they conjured the loved ones who had taught them the recipes.

The intemet community that coalesced around MasterChef mainly agreed that Julie Goodwin won in 2009 because she was a home cook who cooked food that lay people wanted to eat. Goodwin's subsequent cookbook. Our Family Table (2010), tums - as the title delineates - the focus to the domestic sphere of cooking, which is presented as gratuitous and thus commercially disinterested. Even judges Calombaris and Gary Mehigan recently published a joint cookbook. Your Place or Mine? (2010), the title of which refers to home and fi'iendship. 2009's mnner-up, Poh Ling Yeow, also regularly cooked dishes during the competition that were derived from home cooking. Poh's ambivalent post- MasterChef status, somewhere between amateur and professional, has been accentuated and capitalised upon in her own television show Poh's Kitchen, where her enthusiasm and aspiration to leam frame her interaction with professional chefs to whom the actual task of cooking is often assigned.

Even as it 'makes over' the everyday practice of cooking by tuming it into spectacle, and through exceptionalising it in the form of the celebrity chef, MasterChef constantly refers back to the enthusiast as an appeal to the 'ordinary' viewers watching and/or cooking at home. The energy of the amateur is mobilised by the show to solicit amateurs who are situated in the 'ordinary' space of the home, and television's location within this space makes it the key medium to achieve this. Yet at the same time as it recognises and celebrates the enthusiasm of the amateur, MasterChef claims to enact a makeover that renders that amateurism obsolete. As Redden reminds us: 'People are there for something to happen to them, to be adjusted, not simply to be "themselves".' (2008: 129)

The unfulfilled before/after schema of MasterChef illustrates that performing the makeover is more important than the final result, particularly as only one will achieve the title. The much-repeated refrain 'The Top 24 Amateur Cooks in the Country', which traces an ambivalent locus between 'top' and 'amateur', prevents movement across the threshold to the professional. The show propels the everyday cooks in the studio (and in the home) to mimic the professional, yet they do not actually achieve that level because that would require commensurate financial compensation for their labour and threaten the jobs of their professional counterparts. According to the logic of capitalism, which is the logic of MasterChef, it makes no sense to have amateurs actualising the professional. It is preferable that they rehearse and/or consume professionalism in order that their practices of labour and consumption can continue to subsidise the costs of production. Despite MasterChef s assertions to the contrary, neo-liberal capitalism provides very few social or economic incentives for the media industries to 'make over' amateurs into professionals.

Media International Australia

34

References

ABC News Online, 2010, 'MasterChef smashes ratings record', 26 July, www.abc.net.au/news/ stories/2010/07/26/2963984.htm.

Andrejevic, M. 2004, Reality TV: The Work of Being Watched, Rowman & Littlefield, Lanham, MD. 2011, 'Real-izing Exploitation', in M. Kraidy and K. Sender (eds). The Politics of Reality

Television, Routledge, London, pp. 18-30. Bonner, F. 2003, Ordinary Television, Sage, London. Bourdieu, P. 1993, The Field of Cultural Production, Polity Press, Cambridge.

2003, Distinction: A Social Critique of the Judgement of Taste, Routledge, London. Biressi, Anita and Nunn, Heather 2005, Reality TV: Realism and Revelation, Wallflower Press, London. Clune, R. 2010, 'Marion Grasby Tipped to Be Mo^terC/ie/Millionaire', The Herald Sun Online,

11 July, www.heraldsun.com.au/entertainment/marion-grasby-tipped-to-be-materchef-millionaire/ story-e6frf96f-1225890315759.

Dunn, A. 2010, 'Why the Great Song and Dance?', The Age Online, 25 July, www.theage.com.au/ entertainment/tv-and-radio/why-the-great-song-and-dance-20100724-10ps4.html.

Film Victoria 2010, 'Television Genre Analysis: Analysis of Free to Air Programming by Genre and Network, Over the 2009/2010 year', http://film.vic.gov.au/www/html/211-resources.asp.

Huntley, R. 2007, Eating Between the Lines, Black Inc., Melboume. Ipsos Australia 2009, 'The "MasterChef Effect" Produces Nation of Home Chefs', 23 July,

www.ipsos.com.au/knowledgecentre/news/090723.aspx. Kroenert, T. 2009a, 'Afo^/erC/ie/Cooks Up Fine Reality Trash', Eureka Street, vol. 19, no. 12,

www.eurekastreet.com.au/article.aspx?aeid= 14832. 2009b, 'MasterChef "Wmner Roasts the Media', Eureka Street, vol. 19, no. 18, www.eurekastreet.

com.au/article.aspx?aeid= 16499. Lewis, T. 2008, Smart Living: Lifestyle Media and Popular Expertise, Peter Lang, New York. Lewis, T. and Martin, F. 2010, 'Leaming Modemity: Lifestyle Advice Television in Australia, Taiwan

and Singapore', Asian Journal of Communication, vol. 20, no. 3, pp. 318-36. Moran, J. 2010, 'Neil Perry Slams Afo^terC/je/"Nobodies'", Sunday Telegraph Online, 18 July,

w w w . d a i l y t e l e g r a p h . c o m . a u / n e i l - p e r r y - s l a m s - m a s t e r c h e f - n o b o d i e s / s t o r y - fn627o8b-l225893387015.

Moseley, R. 2001, '"Real Lads Do Cook ... But Some Things are Still Hard to Talk About": The Gendering of 8-9', European Journal of Cultural Studies, vol. 4, no. 1, pp. 32-39.

Olding, R. and Taffel, J. 2010, 'MasterChef Vms Drive Specialty Boom', The Age Online, 27 July, www.theage.com.au/entertainment/restaurants-and-bars/masterchef-fans-drive-specialty-boom- 20100726-10smk.html.

Pawie, F. 2010, ' MasterChef Cooks Half-baked', The Australian Online, 21 July, www.theaustralian. com.au/news/executive-lifestyle/masterchef-cooks-half-baked/story-e6frg8jo-1225894887593.

Redden, G. 2008, 'Making Over the Talent Show', in G. Palmer (ed.). Exposing Lifestyle Television: The Big Reveal, Ashgate, Aldershot, pp. 129-44.

Ross, A. 2009, 'The Political Economy of Amateurism', Television & New Media, vol. 10, no. 1, pp. 136-37.

Tumer, G. 2009, Ordinary People and the Media: The Demotic Turn, Sage, London.

Kirsten Seale is a researcher in the School of Media and Communication, RMIT University.

No. 143 —May 2012

35

Copyright of Media International Australia (8/1/07-current) is the property of Media International Australia

(MIA) and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the

copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for

individual use.

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._MasterChefs Amateur Makeovers.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Media Melbourne - Theoretical Traditions.pdf

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Media Melbourne - Theoretical Traditions.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/Talkback Advertising and Journalism.pdf

A R T I C L E

INTERNATIONAL journal of

CULTURAL studies

Copyright © 2000 SAGE Publications London, Thousand Oaks,

CA and New Delhi Volume 3(2): 247–255

[1367-8779(200008)3:2; 247–255; 013880]

Talkback, advertising and journalism

A cautionary tale of self-regulated commercial radio

● Graeme Turner

University of Queensland

A B S T R A C T ● Commercial radio in Australia was effectively deregulated in the late 1980s, when the statutory regulatory requirements were replaced by industry self-regulation. One of the effects of this deregulation has been a narrowing of the range of programming formats across the industry which has, in turn, dramatically increased the commercial power of the successful radio talkback hosts on the AM band. The eruption of a scandal involving a number of these talkback hosts in 1999 exposed problems in the way that self-regulation had operated. This article outlines what has become a case study of the failure of self-regulation to protect the public interest. ●

K E Y W O R D S ● commercial radio ● media regulation ● radio talkback

Media regulation is fast falling out of fashion internationally. The perceived effects of new media – the traffic in information flows across national borders without becoming subject to regulatory restrictions – have made people question the capacity of national media regulations to affect global- ized communications systems. As media organizations become ‘global’ in their interests and organizational structures (and I acknowledge that what ‘global’ means in this context is almost entirely a First World conception of the planet), their commercial and political power in local, national and inter- national markets increases at the same time as their identification with the

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 247

248 INTERNATIONAL journal of CULTURAL studies 3(2)

political interests of the locality or nation decreases. Political preferences for small government, for allowing the market to handle the distribution of choices and opportunities, have eroded support for the idea that the national public should exercise some control over its media industries. A recent scandal in Australia was made possible by government giving way to pre- cisely these kinds of influences on media policy. The ‘Cash for Comment’ affair (the scandal over the commercial behaviour of Australian talkback hosts, which will be outlined in more detail later on in this article) has high- lighted the fact that there are still clear and significant differences between those principles supported by a regulatory system organized around an assumption of public service and civic responsibility, and those principles supported to maintain the orderly operation of the market. And the differ- ences do, we discover, matter.

What follows is primarily narrative, a small fable about the point of regu- lating commercial radio. It reports on what now seems to be something like a controlled experiment on the self-regulation of radio that has just been conducted in Australia. Conditions that have been in place since the late 1980s have finally produced some interesting results.

Commercial radio in Australia

We need to begin by sketching the context in which Australian commercial radio operated until the mid-1980s. Until this time, commercial radio was a regulated industry, with periodic public licence hearings, obligatory codes of conduct and an overseeing body, the Australian Broadcasting Tribunal, which had teeth and the courage to use them against individual broadcast- ers as well as licence holders. Patterns of ownership were relatively widely dispersed. There were two national networks, but most stations were locally owned and local in content. In fact, from the mid-1970s to the mid-1980s, radio became a highly localized medium in Australia as it addressed niche taste and geographic markets. As it carried largely local rather than national advertising, it was not a highly profitable medium. Since the introduction of FM radio in 1974 – primarily operating through AOR (album-oriented rock) or classic hits music formats – the AM band had found it hard to build audiences for its formats of talk, sport and easy listening or classic hits music.

All this began to change in about 1986. At this point there was an ex- plosion in media trading as media companies suddenly became highly sought after by investors from other industries. Television in particular attracted interest, with every channel in the country changing hands at least once over the next four years. One of the provocations for this was the aggregation of regional markets for television, which closed down a lot of stations while setting in place for the first time formal acceptance of the

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 248

establishment of national television networks. Previously this had been explicitly rejected in order to defend principles of localism and diversity of ownership, and the change in policy made television a much more attract- ive investment. FM music stations, as the dominant force in the radio indus- try, were highly sought after as well. The federal government’s introduction of what was called the National Radio Plan set out to rationalize the indus- try as well as to exploit what seemed a bullish market for radio stations on the FM band. New FM licences were offered for auction, with AM opera- tors being given the first opportunity to switch bands if they wished.

These two policy interventions by the federal government – the aggre- gation of regional television markets coupled with the establishment of national television networks, and the National Radio Plan – had disastrous effects on radio.1 The aggregation of television markets forced regional tele- vision companies to seek advertising revenue from national rather than local advertisers. The National Radio Plan’s auction prices drove up the debt levels and operating costs of the whole industry, also forcing radio propri- etors to seek national rather than local advertising. The increased compe- tition in both industries has shaped their business strategies ever since.

Initially, there was a stampede to convert to the FM band, but the costs of conversion eventually convinced wiser heads they were better off staying with the AM band. However, the number of stations available on FM had increased to the point where it now attracted most listeners, and AM pro- prietors faced great difficulty in building an audience for alternative formats. Many stations and all networks changed hands, were asset stripped and sold again, or were subsumed into larger corporate strategies designed for highly diversified businesses not primarily concerned with the media. Some metro- politan and many regional AM stations did not survive this period, and even the FM band had trouble maintaining its commercial viability. By the time this process had played itself out, Australia had two FM networks with vir- tually identical formats and audience demographics. Their similarity is marked by the fact that in Brisbane both FM music stations are owned by the same company, operate out of the same building and share the same newsroom. Competition had ultimately eradicated the competition.

The commercial radio industry was in such a parlous state by 1989, and the government was so thoroughly implicated in forming the conditions that had placed the industry in this position, that something had to give. Drawing on the localism that had marked radio’s recent focus up until this period, the government found it convenient to consider the possibility that radio was no longer sufficiently influential as a national medium to demand regu- lation at all. Further, it acknowledged that the costs of the industry’s com- pliance with federal regulation were contributing unnecessarily to the difficulties that proprietors faced in trying to remain viable. In a first step, the federal government stopped using the licence conversion process to raise money. In a policy reversal that revealed how poorly the initial policy had

Turner ● Talkback, advertising and journalism 249

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 249

250

been drafted, government was forced to offer assistance to the cash-strapped operators. In a much more significant but related step, the government accepted the proposition that deregulation was necessary to enable com- mercial operators to survive. It moved radio outside the independent and obligatory regulation structures, effectively allowing the market to serve as the mechanism2 through which the industry became self-regulating.

Obviously such a move would have wide-ranging effects but I wish to concentrate on those that bear on the events at the centre of this narrative. One of the requirements on licensees under the regulatory system was a commitment to present a local and independently sourced news bulletin. In many cases, this translated into some coverage of current affairs as well, and certainly into maintaining an independent news-gathering staff. Under self- regulation, this requirement was removed, opening the way to the complete evacuation of current affairs programming from commercial radio and the dramatic downsizing of newsrooms and news staffing across the sector. Most commercial radio stations now do not have their own newsroom but operate shared facilities, or use syndicated ‘rip-and-read’ agencies or net- worked news services. Compulsory codes of conduct, which had once enabled the ABT’s quite detailed scrutiny of what was said on air, were replaced with advisory codes of practice activated by a poorly advertised and effectively in-house complaints procedure. The government regulatory structure had its teeth drawn in a similar accommodation with the notion of market regulation. The ABT had proved a doughty defender of the prin- ciples of public responsibility: it once pursued high-profile entrepreneur Alan Bond to have him classified as ‘unfit’ to operate a licence after he revealed that he had paid a Queensland premier to do business in the state. This did not make the Australian Broadcasting Tribunal (ABT) popular with either the industry or the politicians. Consequently, when the ABT was replaced in 1992, the new Broadcasting Services Act set up its successor, the Australian Broadcasting Authority (ABA), as a comparatively toothless complaints agency with no obligatory codes of conduct, no capacity to act against individual broadcasters in response to complaints, and few effective penalties or sanctions to levy against those proprietors who are found in breach of the terms of their licence.

This new, minimalist, approach to regulation certainly left the industry free to shape itself unimpeded. What the market produced in terms of pro- gramming formats was an industry dominated by FM music stations and AM talk. Music formats were dominated by classic hits and easy listening; teen radio lost favour with advertisers and thus disappeared from the formats in use as well. Music formats, generally, have narrowed further over the 1990s, and what is programmable as talk has narrowed as well. Talk radio in commercial terms is now almost exclusively ‘talkback’ or what the British refer to as ‘call-in’. At the time of writing, the market leaders in Sydney – the largest radio market in the country – are all talkback hosts.

INTERNATIONAL journal of CULTURAL studies 3(2)

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 250

The most high profile of these hosts, John Laws, despite being only second in his timeslot in Sydney at the moment, is networked around the country to be accessible by 75 percent of the Australian audience. The amounts paid to talkback hosts – their salaries are in the millions – in some cases exceed those paid to the proprietors of the stations. The commercial power of talk- back hosts is overwhelming as they have become, apparently, the only viable format for AM radio. And, crucially, this format has taken on a particular character – more in line with the kind of performance we find on American radio than on, say, British or European stations. Talkback hosts keep their audiences in Australia through the promotion of their own power and per- sonality as the commodity on offer. As a result, they are opinionated, reactionary, arrogant and personally abusive to callers who offend them. The epitome of what is usually talked about as the tabloidization of the media, they are also the first port of call for politicians on the campaign trail. It is a worrying fact that talkback radio exercises an increasingly important influence over the shape and content of political and social debate in Australia – an influence that is out of all proportion to the quality of infor- mation they seek or provide. As a result, it is no surprise to find that attempts have been made to harness that influence.

The ‘cash for comment’ scandal

An index of the commercial power of the talkback host is the fact that adver- tising rates for ‘live reads’ of commercials (that is, not a commercial pro- fessionally produced in advance, but a text read to air by the host – usually with some embroidering to establish their personal endorsement of the product) are significantly higher than those for prerecorded commercials. For many years there have been rumours that these hosts have also earned fees for more subtle forms of endorsement – incidental comments favouring particular businesses or products, or the provision of a particular ‘spin’ on a news or political item to favour the organization paying the fee or pro- viding a service. (Rarely have the hosts been accused of abusing their power in order to express their own political opinions, though; the charge is not bias, but graft.) Even the ABA takes a dim view of this. Such a practice offends against the code of practice for journalists that underpins the self- regulatory regime. It also breaches the conditions of the radio licence in that it blurs the distinction between advertising and programme content. But it has been widely assumed to occur.

In July 1999, the Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC) pro- gramme MediaWatch broadcast something of a scoop. It had written evi- dence that talkback host John Laws had accepted a deal with the Australian Bankers Association to air a segment called ‘The Whole Truth’ which aimed to defend the bankers against widespread public criticism of

Turner ● Talkback, advertising and journalism 251

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 251

252

their increasingly arrogant treatment of their customers and the clarity with which they have focused on building their profits. Laws had always promoted himself as a champion of the ordinary person, and had been a vigorous critic of the banks through his show – taking the part of the small customers seen to be bearing the brunt of the corporations’ rationaliza- tions. However, the MediaWatch story provided evidence that Laws, through his agent, had approached the banks with an offer to stop criti- cizing them if they paid him money. The banks accepted, and a deal worth $1.2m was struck. In return for this fee, Laws would cease his criticism, air ‘The Whole Truth’ and put a positive spin on bank-related stories throughout his broadcasts. At no time were any of these arrangements revealed to Laws’ listeners; his change of heart was explained by his access to ‘The Whole Truth’.

The airing of this story produced a vigorous response. No fewer than five inquiries were set up to establish whether Laws’ actions constituted un- ethical, actionable or even criminal behaviour (the possibility that this might constitute extortion was eventually thrown out because the banks were such willing and satisfied participants). There were internal inquiries in the bankers association and in the radio station concerned (Sydney AM station 2UE), and inquiries by the Australian Consumers and Competition Com- mission, by the New South Wales Director of Public Prosecutions, and by the ABA. As a result of these inquiries, it was revealed that Laws had similar arrangements with other organizations, pulling in a total of nearly $2m for 1999 in undisclosed commercial obligations to advertisers on his show.3

Most of these arrangements had political as well as public image objectives; clients such as Qantas and the Truckers’ Association were engaged in dis- putes with government and used Laws as part of a political lobbying cam- paign.4 Furthermore, Laws was not alone. At least one other talkback host on 2UE earned similar amounts in a similar, secret manner. Most media commentators agreed that the practice was endemic in the industry, and further inquiries were launched into instances in Perth and Adelaide; one talkback host in Victoria admitted to similar obligations and was promptly sacked.

Laws was unrepentant, defending his behaviour as perfectly legitimate commercial practice. Accurately enough, he pointed out that the only code of practice built into the self-regulatory structure relates to the profession of journalism. He is an entertainer, not a journalist, and so is outside the remit of this code of practice. As to the ethics of misleading an audience by pretending to hold points of view that are actually the product of a con- tractual agreement, he argued that no one expected otherwise of him and so his listeners had not been misled. Significantly, it proved then – and as the inquiry developed it continued to prove – very difficult to get the talk- back hosts to acknowledge the relevance of an ethical code of conduct to their role in the entertainment industry.

INTERNATIONAL journal of CULTURAL studies 3(2)

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 252

The return of the repressed: media ethics

The inquiry by the ABA, referred to in the press as the ‘Cash for Comment’ inquiry, offered the spectacle of the talkback hosts having to defend what they do against legal and ethical challenges that had not been a part of their regulatory environment for a decade and a half. The hearing’s findings strongly criticized the talkback hosts, their radio station’s management, and their ethical assumptions, before going on to add restrictive (and compul- sory) new conditions for appropriate disclosure of contractual obligations to 2UE’s licence. The cases in Adelaide and Perth are still under way as I write. Although the full consequences of this experiment in self-regulation are still to play themselves out, there are number of important issues that have been exposed by the ABA hearings.

Under the post-1992 self-regulatory system, a system that makes almost no reference to principles of civic responsibility, the ABA turns out to have almost no power to penalize licensees or force compliance with its codes or rulings. Furthermore, it is virtually impossible for the ABA to penalize an individual broadcaster for his or her behaviour on air. In the Laws case, the findings suggested that repeated offences might be punished, but the inquiry had before it literally hundreds of instances. If they did not constitute a case, it is hard to imagine what would. The fact that the regulatory authority had taken no action on earlier reports of such practices (and it hadn’t) was offered as prima facie evidence that such practices were tacitly tolerated. That is not such an outlandish claim because it is hard to understand why this MediaWatch story was taken up and several previous instances were not. The weakness of the remit given to the ABA produced a regressive cycle: the lack of power seems to have engendered a reluctance to act, which further degraded the capacity to act in the future.

A second issue is the installation of an industry-based code of conduct as the primary principle around which self-regulation could be structured was simply inappropriate. The broad application of a professional code devel- oped for journalists throughout the media professions should never have been accepted. When tested, of course, it proved irrelevant and exposed the fact that there is no ethical regime for entertainers. Under the current regu- latory system, media personalities who are not journalists have no particu- lar constraints on their behaviour at all. The provision of entertainment, potentially, is a defence for any kind of media content and for any kind of commercial relationship.

It is no surprise that an industry- or market-based regulatory code is not inclined to foreground the protection of the interests of the public or the consumer. For media regulation to work at all, it must have some way of dealing with this – of privileging public interests over commercial interests. There is little reason why a self-regulating industry would choose to find a means of protecting the public interest of its own accord. When the industry

Turner ● Talkback, advertising and journalism 253

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 253

254

is composed of a few highly influential players, when it is dominated by net- works that have links with other media forms and with other spheres of business, the public interest has little leverage over them. The political power enjoyed by the major media organizations in Australia makes them effec- tively untouchable, and the ABA’s pitifully ineffective attempts to bring one of them to book has demonstrated that conclusively.

This is not the end of the story. Media professionals and commentators alike have been embarrassed to discover how utterly the discourses of media ethics had been expunged from the specific concerns of the current regu- latory regime. As a result, commentary in the news media across the board has rediscovered the principle of public interest as a factor that was buried once the media began to be treated as just another industry. The importance of independence to journalistic ethics has also enjoyed something of a revival. (The Sydney Morning Herald installed a new regime for its reporters that outlawed gifts of any kind over the value $10, including such induce- ments as trips to new resorts for travel feature writers and the like. Time will tell how long that lasts.) Government statements on the ‘Cash for Comment’ case have explicitly raised the possibility of a return to compul- sory codes of practice subject to regulation by an external and independent body. Even the government can see the disadvantages in allowing the system that has been uncovered to thrive unchecked.

In a nice coincidence of timing, the Productivity Commission is due to release its report on the regulation of media – a report that has been in prep- aration for a year or so – and has already released its draft findings. Ironi- cally, since the Productivity Commission is the driest of economic policy institutions, although it recommends the thorough commercialization of the media system and the introduction of new players into the Australian media market, it also recommends a much tighter, public interest-related, regu- latory system for complaints, corrections and redress.

Although the ABA inquiry has produced less than startling results – neither of the two key figures lost their jobs, and only one of them suffered a significant drop in the ratings – it does seem to have made the media’s ethical performance a contemporary issue again. It is now possible to foresee revision of the current market-driven regulatory stricture and a partial recovery of earlier principled positions that require a level of disclosure, ethical conduct, community safeguards and public responsibility from media organizations. It is also possible to see these flowing on to television through the final report of the Productivity Commission.

The story I have been telling, then, is one of self-regulation taken to its logical conclusion – to the point where its failure to serve the public inter- est is dramatically manifest. That failure has helped to put the public inter- est – the point of media regulation – back on an agenda from which it had been displaced by the logics of the market more than a decade ago. It is worth noting that the means through which the failure of the system was

INTERNATIONAL journal of CULTURAL studies 3(2)

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 254

exposed was a story on a public broadcasting network, the Australian Broadcasting Corporation. It was taken up and prosecuted most vigorously through the one newspaper proprietor who did not have tight corporate affiliations with the commercial radio sector. The very existence of such a proprietor is a consequence of one of the remaining regulatory hedges against the concentration of media power – restrictions on cross-media ownership. Finally, this story is a reminder of the basic misconception involved in treating the media industries only as industries, and their content as simply another form of consumer product. As a result of having learnt this lesson again, it is now clear that the task of restructuring the Australian radio industry and the regulatory environment in which it operates will not be left entirely to the market.

Notes

1 See my ‘Who Killed the Radio Star’, in Tony Bennett, Simon Frith, Larry Grossberg, John Shepherd and Graeme Turner (eds) Rock and Popular Music: Industries, Policies, Politics, pp. 142–55 (London and New York: Routledge, 1993). See also Toby Miller, ‘Making a Bad Thing Worse: The Federal Government and Commercial FM’, in Albert Moran (ed.) Stay Tuned: An Australian Broadcasting Reader, pp. 90–4 (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1992).

2 A good example of the thinking behind the deregulation, and the arguments used to make it seem like a natural development as a result of natural changes in the radio industry, can be found in Mark Armstrong (1986) ‘The Deregu- lation of Radio’, Media Information Australia 41: 45–9.

3 Anne Davies (1999) ‘Golden Tonsils: What They Were Paid’, Sydney Morning Herald, 21 October, p. 4.

4 Caroline Overington (1999) ‘Talk Bank Radio’, The Age News Extra, 23 October, p. 6.

● GRAEME TURNER is Director of the Centre for Critical and Cultural Studies at the University of Queensland, Brisbane, Australia. His most recent book is (with Frances Bonner and P. David Marshall) Fame Games: The Production of Celebrity in Australia (Cambridge University Press, 2000). Address: Centre for Critical and Cultural Studies, 7th Floor, Duhig Tower, University of Queensland, QLD-4072, Australia. [email: [email protected]] ●

Turner ● Talkback, advertising and journalism 255

13turner 9ds) 4/7/00 10:42 am Page 255

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._Talkback Advertising and Journalism.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/The networked young citizen social media political participation and civic engagement.pdf

Full Terms & Conditions of access and use can be found at http://www.tandfonline.com/action/journalInformation?journalCode=rics20

Download by: [The University Of Melbourne Libraries] Date: 09 April 2017, At: 23:30

Information, Communication & Society

ISSN: 1369-118X (Print) 1468-4462 (Online) Journal homepage: http://www.tandfonline.com/loi/rics20

The networked young citizen: social media, political participation and civic engagement

Brian D. Loader, Ariadne Vromen & Michael A. Xenos

To cite this article: Brian D. Loader, Ariadne Vromen & Michael A. Xenos (2014) The networked young citizen: social media, political participation and civic engagement, Information, Communication & Society, 17:2, 143-150, DOI: 10.1080/1369118X.2013.871571

To link to this article: http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2013.871571

Published online: 28 Jan 2014.

Submit your article to this journal

Article views: 11404

View related articles

View Crossmark data

Citing articles: 27 View citing articles

INTRODUCTION

The networked young citizen: social media, political participation and civic engagement

Brian D. Loadera*, Ariadne Vromenb and Michael A. Xenosc

aDepartment of Sociology, University of York, Heslington YO10 5DD, UK; bDepartment of Government, University of Sydney, New South Wales, Australia; cDepartment of Communication Arts, University of Wisconsin-Madison, Madison, USA

The accusations that young people are politically apathetic and somehow failing in their duty to participate in many democratic societies worldwide have been refuted by a growing number of academics in recent years (Loader, 2007; Marsh, O’Toole, & Jones, 2007). Undoubtedly many young citizens have indeed become disenchanted with mainstream political parties and with those who claim to speak on their behalf. But this should not be misinterpreted as a lack of interest on the part of youth with the political issues that influence their everyday lived experience and their normative concerns for the planet and its inhabitants. As the recent waves of protest dem- onstrations by young people in all their different forms and contexts testify, the suggestion that the next generation of citizens is any less politically engaged than previous ones seems at least premature. How then are we to understand the actions and political values of the future custodians of our polities and what are their implications for democratic governance?

There can be little doubt that the institutions and practices of modern representative govern- ment have been subject to growing disillusionment from young citizens. A reluctance to vote at elections, join political parties or have a high regard for their politicians all suggest that many young people are turning away from mainstream politics in many countries (Fieldhouse, Tranmer, & Russell, 2007; Van Biezen, Mair, & Poguntke, 2012). Instead, participation in social movements, rallies, protests, consumer boycotts all point to the possible displacement of traditional models of representative democracy as the dominant cultural form of engagement by alternative approaches increasingly characterized through networking practices. The political identity and attitudes of young citizens are thereby seen to be increasingly shaped less by their social ties to family, neighbourhood, school or work, but rather by the manner in which they par- ticipate and interact through the social networks which they themselves have had a significant part in constructing. Central to this model of ‘networked individualism’ (Rainie & Wellman, 2012) is the role played by the Internet and network communication technologies. Of particular relevance, and the primary focus of this edited collection, is the potential of social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and YouTube for influencing the political deportment and civic engagement of what we describe as the networked young citizen.

© 2014 Taylor & Francis

*Corrresponding author. Email: [email protected]

Information, Communication & Society, 2014 Vol. 17, No. 2, 143–150, http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/1369118X.2013.871571

Assembling the networked young citizen

The debate on citizenship is replete with discourses that exhort young people to adopt the dutiful practices of participation that correspond to the regulatory norms established by earlier gener- ations. Thus active citizens should vote at elections, respect their representatives, join political groups and engage in voluntary activities in their civic communities. It is a model of the citizen as someone who should be seen to support the representative system through their dutiful actions but whose voice should not be heard. Indeed, the very future prospects for democ- racy are seen to depend upon the support of the electorate as performed and reproduced through these acts of citizenship. Small wonder then that the political class in many democracies is so con- cerned about the disaffection of so many young people with these norms of participation (Putnam, 2000; Stoker, 2006).

This emergent disjuncture between conventional representative government and the everyday concerns of young people was vividly captured in a television discussion between the forthright BBC interviewer Jeremy Paxman and the charismatic and opinionated celebrity actor and comic Russell Brand in the Autumn of 2013. Brand had been invited by The New Statesman political magazine to be a guest editor for one of its issues and so was asked to discuss his political views on the late night current affairs programme Newsnight. While a sometimes controversial figure this was the first time that Brand had entered the world of ‘celebrity politics’ (Street, 2004). Often condescending in his style of interrogation Paxman on this occasion appeared to be genuinely engaged by Brand’s arguments. What seemed to surprise Paxman in particular was Brand’s admission that he had never voted and that he extolled young people to follow his example. In this excerpt Brand justifies his view.

I’m not voting out of apathy, I’m not voting out of absolute indifference, and weariness and exhaus- tion from the lies, treachery, deceit of the political class that has been going on for generations and which has reached fever pitch where we have a disenfranchised, disillusioned, despondent underclass that are not being represented by that political system so voting for it is tacit complicity with that system. And that is not something I’m offering up.

In many respects through this intervention in print and on television Brand is following a familiar path taken by other popular celebrities entering the political sphere. As John Street has described it, ‘celebrity politics is a code for the performance of representations through the gestures and media available to those who wish to claim “representativeness”’ (Street, 2004, p. 445). Thus despite the fact that Brand does not explicitly claim to speak on behalf of younger people, his accomplished use of the media to challenge the conventional perspectives of democratic engagement can be inter- preted as just such an attempt to speak more legitimately than politicians for young citizens whose voice is seldom heard (Coleman, 2002). In this sense his performance, as seen on television and more widely through YouTube, can be regarded as an act intended to disrupt the normative repetitive depictions of the dutiful citizen. Instead, when asked by Paxman to give an alternative to a model of democracy as voting, he replied with a response which foregrounds an emerging con- temporary political aesthetic through which young citizens can engage.

The time is now, change is occurring, we are at a time when communication is instantaneous and there are communities all over the world. The Occupy movement made a difference, even if only that it introduced to the popular public lexicon the idea of the 1% versus the 99%. People for the first time in a generation are aware of massive corporate and economic exploitation. These things are not nonsense and these are subjects which are not being addressed… .Until they are taken seriously …why would I encourage a constituency of young people who are indifferent to vote?

144 B. Loader et al.

The ‘representativeness’ of Brand is here expressed as an attempt to claim that the political class is failing to address some of the most important challenges confronting young citizens. Instead, alternative communication channels and modes of action, such as those enacted during the Arab Spring or Occupy movement express the voice of young citizens around the world.

While less dramatic or entertaining than Brand’s narrative, a groundswell of academic opinion has also suggested that the political attitudes of many young people in many parts of the world can increasingly be characterized by a less deferential and more individualized (Beck, 1992; Giddens, 1991; Inglehart, 1990) self-actualizing (Bennett, Wells, & Rank, 2009) and critical disposition (Norris, 2002) which marks a departure from the dutiful norms of citizenship (Dalton, 2008). Such cultural changes to political participation are shaped of course by wider economic and social forces and they do not happen overnight. Moreover, the decline in mainstream engagement has been ongoing for some time in many countries (Norris, 2002). Instead of regarding them as the death knell of western models of democracy however, it may be more useful to see them as potentially heralding a recalibration of modern political institutions and practices in ways that are more sensitive to the dissatisfaction felt by many young people with their political systems. Young citizens may as a consequence be finding new ways to voice their opinions and garnering new agents of representativeness such Russell Brand to envision their views.

What then does our emerging networked young citizen look like? How can we recognize these actors? Drawing from the literature (Bang, 2004; Beck, 1994; Bennett, Wells, & Freelon, 2011; Giddens, 1991) it is helpful to take a number of key features to assemble what we call the networked young citizen. Networking young citizens are far less likely to become members of political or civic organizations such as parties or trades unions; they are more likely to partici- pate in horizontal or non-hierarchical networks; they are more project orientated; they reflexively engage in lifestyle politics; they are not dutiful but self-actualizing; their historical reference points are less likely to be those of modern welfare capitalism but rather global information net- worked capitalism and their social relations are increasingly enacted through a social media net- worked environment.

This is of course an ideal type construction and is not intended to represent all young citizens in every respect. Its value is as a framework against which we may assess the normative political dispositions of young people. So the networked young citizen is not necessarily typical of all young people in every society. Our objective is not to provide yet another generalization about all young people being characterized as a type. Rather, we believe that it is a useful analytical device by which to assess the evidence for cultural change. Some further clarifications need to be made to our assemblage. First, this does not represent an all-encompassing discontinuity with previous dutiful models. Networked young citizens may live conterminously with other dutiful citizens and indeed share some of each other’s attributes on occasions. Second, networked citizenship can be seen as fluid and always under construction within regulatory norms and struc- turing processes. A model of citizenship that is fluid and constituent of lived experience does not suggest apathy but rather an identity whose realization has to be performed and enacted. Part of that performance may surely include disrupting dominant discourses and repeated citations res- onant of dutiful models of citizenship (Loader, 2012). Third, networking young citizens are shaped by different individual lived experiences that will not be the same for everyone. Conse- quently issues of inequality and power come into play. Networks and networking do not imply a power vacuum where all are equal. Instead, the benefits accrued by access to social and cultural capital through particular networks foreground the need to differentiate between social networks. Networks exhibit new regulatory norms of exclusion as well as inclusion. It also requires us to consider what kinds of capacities are required by young people for effective networked citizenship.

Information, Communication & Society 145

Are all young citizens networked equally?

The competitive advantages to be accrued through membership of the most resource-rich net- works have become particularly pronounced as a consequence of the world financial crisis since 2007. While young people as a whole have been disproportionately hit harder by these events compared with other age groups the burdens have not been evenly distributed across all young people. Educational and employment opportunities for young people have been signifi- cantly influenced by social and cultural factors such as class, ethnicity, gender, sexuality and location.

Consequently, the economic recession has both compounded the alienation of many young citizens and threatens to produce further personal insecurity for millions of individuals as they join the ranks of the emerging precariat (Standing, 2011).

In Europe, for example, it is estimated that 94 million young people (15–29) face an uncertain future in the labour market and risk becoming politically and socially marginalized. A danger therefore exists of a growing mass of disenchanted young people subject to unemployment, inse- cure job prospects and without voice or representation in the public domain. In August 2013 approximately one quarter of young European citizens were unemployed (Eurostat). A more accurate indicator providing figures for those ‘not in employment, education or training’ (NEETs) is still alarmingly high with 14 million aged 15–29 recorded in 2011. This situation is not uniform across Member States with NEET figures being significantly higher in the East (e.g. Romania, Bulgaria) and South (e.g. Portugal, Spain, Greece) compared with those in the north (e.g. Germany, the Netherlands, the UK, Nordic countries). In the United States the figure for those out of work or education was almost 16% of 18–29-year-olds in October 2013. The transition from youth to adulthood in the twenty-first century is therefore beset by growing social inequality, structural unemployment and a disaffection with politics which when combined are shaping the opportunities for social inclusion and security of many young citizens.

How then does the networked young citizen relate to this picture of global social and econ- omic inequality? Recent developments suggest a strong relationship between social media use and political engagement that raises questions about the potential for social media to help stem or even reverse patterns of political inequality that have troubled scholars for years. Michael Xenos, Ariadne Vromen and Brian D. Loader explore this contention in the second article of this special issue of iCS where they articulate a model of social media and political engagement among young people, and test it using data from representative samples of young citizens in Australia, the United States, and the UK. Their results suggest a strong, positive relationship between social media use and political engagement among young people across all three countries, and provide additional insights into the role played by social media use in the processes by which young people become politically engaged. Notably, the results also provide reasons to be cautiously optimistic concerning the overall influence of this popular new form of social net- working on longstanding patterns of political inequality.

For some time a number of academics have believed that the interactive, collaborative and user-generated content capacities of social media technologies themselves offer the prospect of facilitating new modes of political communication which are more commensurate with those con- temporary youth cultures associated with the networked young citizen. They point to an electoral affinity between what are perceived as the inherent democratic features of social media and their potential for enhancing the participative and deliberative skills of young citizens (Benkler, 2006; Jenkins, 2006; Leadbeater, 2008). This notion of participatory culture has quickly managed to gain a strong foothold in contemporary debates about social media and user engagement. The concept’s primary advocate, Henry Jenkins, uses it to describe a cultural situation in which

146 B. Loader et al.

established relations between media producers and users have been disrupted to the point at which ‘ …we might now see them as participants who interact with each other…’ (Jenkins, 2006, p. 3). Hence, studies of for instance Facebook, blogging and YouTube have looked into what participa- tory practices these environments offer and are capable of fostering. Overall, these studies have often looked for, and found, engaged online users and inspiring participatory practices –

especially among young people. But what is the impact of engagement, and participation, within participatory cultures of

social media on the public orientation of young people? On this connection, the existing literature is rather unclear. The third article in this special issue, written by Mats Ekström, Tobias Olsson, and Adam Shehata, addresses this question by drawing upon longitudinal survey data from a sample of Swedish 13–18-year-olds. The concept of public orientation is measured by three indi- cators: young people’s values, interests and everyday peer talk. These indicators are analysed with reference to respondents’ Internet orientations, which are conceptualized as four separate but interrelated spaces (a news space, a space for social interaction, a game space and a creative space). The results primarily emphasize the importance of orientations towards news space and space for social interaction. Overall, the findings strongly suggest that orientations towards these spaces are related to adolescents’ public orientation. The findings confirm the centrality of news and information in political socialization, but they also challenge the idea that social media platforms – such as Facebook, Twitter and blogging – enable forms of social interaction and creative production that have an overall positive impact on young people’s public orientation.

Transitions from childhood to adulthood

As one might expect from a period when dutiful conceptions of citizenship were de rigueur scho- lars exploring how young people were socialized into their political attitudes regarded the role of parents as paramount. Values and political orientations were seen as transmitted from parent to child in a linear learning mode. The networking young citizen model, constituent of self- actualizing, reflexive and interactive attributes, would suggest however a more complex and criti- cal learning path in which the young person plays a more co-constructive role. In our next article Emily Vraga, Leticia Bode, Jung Hwan Yang, Stephanie Edgerly, Kjerstin Thorson, Chris Wells, and Dhavan V. Shah draw upon contemporary theories of political socialization which move away from traditional transmission perspectives to consider the diverse ways in which parents and chil- dren can develop discrete political orientations. In their study during a competitive US presiden- tial campaign they examine various pathways through which influence occurs across generations in terms of partisanship and candidate evaluations. Their results suggest that while harmonious attitudes remain the norm, there are substantial opportunities for young citizens to demonstrate their independence, particularly when gaining different perspectives from schools and social media sources. Their findings are an important contribution to our understanding of how young networking citizens and their parents come to understand politics and the factors that shape youth socialization. Of particular influence in this new socialization perspective is the role played by social media as a means of facilitating mutual understanding between parents and young people.

How then do these social networking environments influence political talk and understanding among young citizens? Do they make it easier for young citizens to chat about the public issues which affect their lived experience? Are they more likely to share political opinions and views? Kjerstin Thorson in her contribution to this special issue provides a microanalysis of political talk and interaction by young citizens networking on Facebook.Her investigation leads her to propose that participatory culture is shaped through social networking sites by social ambiguities that can actually increase the risk and uncertainties associated with talking politics rather than reducing

Information, Communication & Society 147

them. She reports on two sets of in-depth interviews conducted to explore the ways that uncertain- ties about audience reception of posts on Facebook inspire strategies for ‘inventing’modes of pol- itical interaction on the one hand, and, for others, to suppress opinion expression by creating the sense that talking politics on the site is a high-risk endeavour.

Alternative networking young citizens?

The final article in this special issue turns to the alternative forms of political engagement as expressions of emerging political norms characteristic of the networked young citizen. James Sloam examines the role that social media has played in the development of protest movements across the continent of Europe. Networking young citizens have mobilized through mass demon- strations such as the indignados, outraged against political corruption and unemployment in Spain, and the Occupy movement voicing its anger against what they see as the social inequality arising from global capitalism. Rejecting traditional political elites and organizations they have also been involved in the development of new political parties such as the German Pirate Party and the Italian Five-Star Movement. As commentators have observed a defining characteristic of these developments has been the manner in which young people have used networks to spread and share their protests across continents and national borders (Bennett & Segerberg, 2012). Sloam seeks to demonstrate how ‘digitally networked action’ has enabled a ‘quickening’ of youth participation – an intensification of political participation among young, highly educated citizens in search of a mouthpiece for their ‘indignation’.

Concluding remarks

The engagement of each new generation of young people with the practices and institutions of democratic governance in a society is an essential means by which such a political system retains its legitimacy. Without their consent and commitment, the authority of politicians and policy-makers to represent the values and interests of future citizens is called into question. The attitudes and political values of young people are therefore often seen as foretelling the future and are regarded as important agents of social and political change. Increasingly shaped by wider forces of globalization, the digital revolution and reflexive individualism, the concept of the networked young citizen may become a compelling one that is gaining currency through empirical investigation. It suggests an emerging generational cohort that is more sceptical of poli- ticians and mainstream conventional political institutions. But it also raises the possibility of the networking young citizen playing a more significant role in reconfiguring our democratic practices.

Opponents of such an approach will no doubt both reject the notion of emerging political norms associated with the networked young citizen and contend that any move away from the dutiful or active citizen model will undermine liberal representative democracy. Fearful of the ‘personalization’ of politics as a means to undermine serious rational deliberation and even encou- rage populist rhetoric of the sort expressed by Russell Brand, such critics can only see these devel- opments as evidence for the trivialization of democracy. Yet in the face of growing evidence to the contrary these commentators seem bereft of ideas to address the growing estrangement between young citizens and mainstream political parties, politicians and electoral engagement. The scepti- cism expressed by young people towards those who represent them rather than being taken as a measure of apathy could instead be seen as a perfectly legitimate democratic attitude of reflexively engaged citizens conscious of their personal circumstances.

Here the distinction between scepticism and cynicism is crucial. The former positive demo- cratic attitude derived from a more informed population and with critical sensibilities can act

148 B. Loader et al.

to strengthen participatory models of democracy previously considered impractical due to the per- ceived poor quality of the electorate (Schumpeter, 1943). Through effective networking young citizens have demonstrated a capacity to increasingly hold representatives to account and criti- cally monitor their policies and actions. Social media combined with other networking opportu- nities enables the networked young citizen to reflexively consider a wider range of political discourses and share these with friends or engage in connective repertoires of political action (Bennett & Segerberg, 2012). Such processes of re-configuration do not require representative systems to disappear but they do demand that our democratic systems need to be more culturally receptive to the lived experiences of those they serve. Coleman (2013) provides an excellent exploration of just how a central democratic act such as voting, when seen as a cultural activity, raises essential questions about its relevance to the emotional experience of those citizens expected to participate. It is an intellectual approach that is both compatible with Russell Brand’s clarion call and pragmatic in its desire to reconnect voting with the electorate’s everyday concerns and changing norms.

But it is also important that such reconfigurations do not disguise differential capabilities and relations of power that are also a constituent feature of networking. As Bourdieu (1984) reminds us, access to social and cultural capital is often used to ensure unequal social distinctions between citizens. In the context of growing social inequality social networking may thus reinforce div- isions that are detrimental to democracy (Schlozman, Verba, & Brady, 2012). While the present academic debate continues to be divided between those who maintain an adherence to dutiful citizenship the contributions to this special issue have all been prepared to recognize that new forms of networked young citizenship, more compatible for the times and contemporary youth culture, may be more fruitful for both understanding contemporary developments and also for future democratic governance.

Notes on contributors Brian D. Loader is Associate-Director of the Science and Technology Studies Unit (SATSU) in the Department of Sociology based at the University of York, UK. [email: [email protected]]

Ariadne Vromen is Associate Professor in the Department of Government and International Relations at the University of Sydney, in Australia. [email: [email protected]]

Michael A. Xenos is Associate Professor of Communication Science at the University of Wisconsin- Madison, USA. [email: [email protected]]

References Bang, H. P. (2004). Culture governance: Governing self-reflexive modernity. Public Administration, 82(1),

157–190. doi:10.1111/j.0033-3298.2004.00389.x Beck, U. (1992). Risk society: Towards a new modernity. London: Sage. Beck, U. (1994). The reinvention of politics: Towards a theory of reflexive modernization. In U. Beck, A.

Giddens, & S. Lash (Eds.), Reflexive modernization: Politics, tradition and aesthetics in modern social order (pp. 1–55). Redwood City, CA: Stanford University Press.

Benkler, Y. (2006). The wealth of networks: How social production transforms markets and freedom. New Haven: Yale University Press.

Bennett, W. L., & Segerberg, A. (2012). The logic of connective action. Information, Communication & Society, 15(5), 739–768. doi:10.1080/1369118X.2012.670661

Bennett, W. L., Wells, C., & Freelon, D. (2011). Communicating civic engagement: Contrasting models of citizenship in the youth web sphere. Journal of Communication, 61(5), 835–856. doi:10.1111/j.1460- 2466.2011.01588.x

Bennett, W. L., Wells, C., & Rank, A. (2009). Young citizens and civic learning: Two paradigms of citizen- ship in the digital age. Citizenship Studies, 13(2), 105–120. doi:10.1080/13621020902731116

Information, Communication & Society 149

Bourdieu, P. (1984). Distinction: A social critique of the judgement of taste. London: Routledge & Kegan & Paul.

Coleman, S. (2002). The people’s voice. In J. Bartle (Ed.), Political communication (pp. 246–258). London: Frank Cass.

Coleman, S. (2013). How voters feel. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Dalton, R. J. (2008). Citizenship norms and the expansion of political participation. Political Studies, 56(1),

76–98. Retrieved from http://doi.wiley.com/10.1111/j.1467-9248.2007.00718.x Fieldhouse, E., Tranmer, M., & Russell, A. (2007). Something about young people or something about elec-

tions? Electoral participation of young people in Europe: Evidence from a multilevel analysis of the European Social Survey. European Journal of Political Research, 46(6), 797–822. doi:10.1111/j. 1475-6765.2007.00713.x

Giddens, A. (1991). Modernity and self identity. Cambridge: Polity. Inglehart, R. (1990). Culture shift in advanced industrial society. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. Jenkins, H. (2006). Convergence culture: Where old and new media collide. New York, NY: New York

University Press. Leadbeater, C. (2008). We-Think: Mass innovation, not mass production. London: Profile Books. Loader, B. D. (2007). Young citizens in the digital age: Political engagement, young people and new media.

London: Routledge. Loader, B. D. (2012). Digital democracy: Towards user-generated politics? In B. Isakhan S. Stockwell

(Eds.), The Edinburgh companion to the history of democracy (pp. 479–490). Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.

Marsh, D., O’Toole, T., & Jones, S. (2007). Young people and politics in the UK. Basingstoke: Palgrave. Norris, P. (2002). Democratic pheonix: Reinventing democratic activism. Cambridge: Cambridge University

Press. Putnam, R. (2000). Bowling alone: The collapse and revival of American community. New York, NY: Simon

& Schuster. Rainie, L., & Wellman, B. (2012). Networked: The new social operating system. Cambridge: MIT Press. Schlozman, K. L., Verba, S., & Brady, H. E. (2012). The unheavenly chorus: Unequal political voice and the

broken promise of American democracy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. Schumpter, J. A. (1943). Capitalism, socialism and democracy. London: Routledge. Standing, G. (2011). The precariat: The new dangerous class. London: Bloomsbury. Stoker, G. (2006). Why politics matters: Making democracy work. Basingstoke: Palgrave. Street, J. (2004). Celebrity politicians: Popular culture and political representation. The British Journal of

Politics & International Relations, 6(4), 435–452. Retrieved from http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/ 10.1111/j.1467-856X.2004.00149.x/full

Van Biezen, I., Mair, P., & Poguntke, T. (2012). Going, going,… gone? The decline of party membership in contemporary Europe. European Journal of Political Research, 51(1), 24–56. doi:10.1111/j.1475-6765. 2011.01995.x

150 B. Loader et al.

  • Assembling the networked young citizen
  • Are all young citizens networked equally?
  • Transitions from childhood to adulthood
  • Alternative networking young citizens?
  • Concluding remarks
  • Notes on contributors
  • References

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._The networked young citizen social media political participation and civic engagement.pdf

remediasectoranalysis/There will be TV I don't know what it will be called.pdf

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 109

Media and Communication (ISSN: 2183-2439) 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122

Doi: 10.17645/mac.v4i3.561

Article

“There Will Still Be Television but I Don’t Know What It Will Be Called!”: Narrating the End of Television in Australia and New Zealand

Jock Given

Swinburne Institute for Social Research, Swinburne University of Technology, VIC 3122, Melbourne, Australia; E-Mail: [email protected]

Submitted: 14 January 2016 | Accepted: 29 February 2016 | Published: 14 July 2016

Abstract Australia and New Zealand, like other countries, have unique TV systems and practices that shape the possibilities ena- bled by emerging technologies, enterprises, behaviors and ideas. This article explores two recent articulations of the concept of television that have motivated ‘end of television’ narratives in the two countries. One is future-oriented – the introduction of online subscription video services from local providers like Fetch TV, Presto, Stan and from March 2015, the international giant Netflix. It draws on a survey of senior people in TV, technology, advertising, production, audience measurement and social media conducted in late 2014 and early 2015. The other is recent history – the switchover from analogue to digital terrestrial television, completed in both countries in December 2013. Digital TV switchover was a global policy implemented in markedly different ways. Television was transformed, though not in the precise ways anticipated. Rather than being in the center of the digital revolution, as the digital TV industry and policy pioneers enthused, broadcast television was, to some extent, overrun by it. The most successful online subscription video service in Australia and New Zealand so far, Netflix, talks up the end of television but serves up a very specific form of it. The article poses a slightly different question to whether or not television is ending: that is, whether, in the post-broadcast, digital era, distinctions between unique TV systems and practices will endure, narrow, dissolve, or morph into new forms of difference.

Keywords digital switchover; digital television; Netflix; subscription video; SVOD; television; video

Issue This article is part of the issue “(Not Yet) the End of Television”, edited by Milly Buonanno (University of Roma “La Sapienza”, Italy).

© 2016 by the author; licensee Cogitatio (Lisbon, Portugal). This article is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribu- tion 4.0 International License (CC BY).

1. Introduction

Asked in early 2015 whether, by 2025, there would still be something called television, Fetch TV CEO Scott Lor- son replied: “Yes—but I don’t know what it will be called!” Fetch TV is a subscription service available in Australia since 2010 that plans to expand to New Zea- land. Customers sign up through their internet service providers or a retailer and get a set-top-box/personal- video-recorder that provides access to broadcast, sub- scription, transactional and online content. They can watch and record broadcast channels and access the networks’ catch-up TV services. They can watch around 40 premium English-language channels as part of the

basic package and pay extra for Netflix and Asian lan- guage channel packages. They can rent or buy from a library of over 4,000 movies and buy episodes or sea- sons of TV shows. They can use web-based apps like YouTube for TV. All of this can be done on TV sets or on iOS and Android mobile devices using free apps.

Fetch TV’s stated goal is to ‘Make TV Better’. Like the service, the organisation is a hybrid, founded and based in Australia and majority-owned by Australians but with a large equity stake held by Malaysian-based Astro All Asia Networks. Scott Lorson, appointed CEO of the start-up business in 2009, is a dual Australian/US citizen with degrees in science and business manage- ment from the University of California at Berkeley, and

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 110

a diverse business background in consumer finance, telecommunications and media (Fell, 2011). He is plac- ing many wagers on the future of television. “We are effectively spreading our chips on the table by betting that a complete solution offering FTA [free-to-air, or broadcast], SVOD, TVOD and traditional linear sub- scription will be required to win the living room and that all important HDMI1 position” (Groves, 2015). It is a hybrid strategy, acknowledging that television is now many things that are used by consumers in many ways, but it also asserts the continuing importance of scarci- ties or bottlenecks: the HDMI connections at house- hold TV receivers and the individual consumers that Fetch TV’s advertising encourages to ‘Show TV who’s boss’. Fetch TV does not imagine the end of television, or even the end of a particular kind of television. In- stead, it proposes to integrate many different kinds of television within a single subscription service, embrac- ing and profiting from the diversification of TV’s forms.

This article explores two recent articulations of the concept of television that have motivated ‘end of tele- vision’ narratives in Australia and New Zealand. One is future-oriented—the introduction of online subscrip- tion video services from local providers like Fetch TV, and from March 2015, the international giant Netflix. The other is recent history—the switchover from ana- logue to digital terrestrial television, completed in both countries in December 2013. The analysis of online subscription video services draws on a survey of 25 senior people in TV, technology, advertising, produc- tion, audience measurement and social media, con- ducted in late 2014 and early 2015. The discussion of the transition from analogue to digital broadcast tele- vision builds on research conducted throughout that long process (see Given, 1998, 2003, 2007, 2015).

Television scholars have suggested many ways to summarise and explain the medium’s history. Writing about TV in the United States, Amanda Lotz proposes three phases: the Network Era (1950s–1970s), the Mul- tichannel Transition (1980s and 1990s), and the Post- Network Era. She describes a gradual transition from the first era, when viewers watched single TV sets in homes, chose from among a small set of options scheduled by network programmers and shared a fairly uniform viewing experience, to the current era, with its multiplicity of devices, service providers, forms of con- tent and modes of viewing. The Network Era drew its enterprises and its dominant organizational form from radio broadcasting and scheduled types of programs through the days and seasons in ways that came to seem natural, as if they were intrinsic to the medium. During the Multichannel Transition, novel technologies including remote controls, VCRs, cable transmission and people meters provided new ways to deliver, choose, watch and measure US television; direct subscription provided a new way to pay for it. Specialized channels became popular and profitable enough to commission

their own programs, encouraging the fragmentation of individual viewing that multiple sets in households ena- bled. Lotz initially envisaged the Post Network Era as “an erosion of network and channel control”, but came to imagine a primarily non-linear future “devoid of net- works or channels” (Lotz, 2014, pp. 21-34).

William Uricchio proposes similar phases but re- names them to emphasise the role of viewer interfaces in each—Dial Television (1950–1975), Remote Control (1975–1999) and From TiVo to YouTube (1999+)—and challenges the lingering perception of stability in the first era. He sets out eight further conditions that de- fine the medium in each of these eras, including scheduling (‘real time’, time shifting, on-demand), amount of content (scarcity, plenty, unlimited), audi- ences (mass, segmented, niche) and metrics (stable, under siege, complete datasets). The first period, roughly equating to Lotz’ Network Era, has come to rep- resent the “conceptual default definition” for television, says Uricchio, although he contends it is “but a blip in the larger developmental history of the medium”. Unlike film, radio and print, television “has from the start demonstrated an unusually opportunistic potential with regard to technological platforms”. The present changes, he argues, are not so much “the end of television as a return to the pluriformity that has long characterized the medium” (Uricchio, 2009, pp. 60-72).

Television’s pluriformity is especially striking when the focus shifts from the United States to the rest of the world. A common observation is that television has been different at different times and in different places (see for example Given, 2003, p. 20). “The fact is”, writes Graeme Turner, “especially since the digital rev- olution and notwithstanding the processes of globaliza- tion, ‘television’ involves such varying forms, platforms, and content in its different national and regional loca- tions that it is increasingly implausible for one set of experiences to be regarded as representative” (Turner, 2011, p. 32). Features that seem central to the distinc- tive shape of the medium at one time and place often emerged earlier or later or not at all in other places. For this article, focused on television in Australia and New Zealand (which I will call A/NZ, when referring to them as a region rather than as separate nation states or markets), there are a number of important differ- ences from the US television of Lotz’ and Uricchio’s phases, including significant variations between the two Antipodean markets themselves. The most im- portant differences lie in local and national program production, the level of commercialization, the scale of national networks, the existence of public broadcasters serving cultural diversity objectives and the degree of multichannel cable and satellite TV take-up.

First, arguably the most important single policy is- sue raised by television in both countries has been its contribution to distinctive local and national cultural and industrial development. Early television was domi-

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 111

nated by British and American programs; the develop- ment of the medium was marked by the increasing production and popularity of local programs, and hence the differences between the actual programs seen by A/NZ and overseas audiences. This is what made TV unlike the audio-visual medium that preceded it, film, where the local box office was and is dominat- ed by Hollywood movies. Australian TV drama had its first big success in the 1960s and increasingly effective program quotas plus government tax concessions and subsidies in the 1980s helped generate a boom, espe- cially in Australian historical mini-series. In New Zea- land, the big local drama breakthrough did not come until the early 1990s after the newly-established fund- ing agency New Zealand on Air supported a daily serial, Shortland Street. Some regulation had encouraged a common A/NZ audio-visual space from the outset: Aus- tralia required all advertising to be produced locally and allowed New Zealand commercials to qualify. From the mid–1990s, New Zealand programs have qualified for Australian program quotas.

Second, US-based phases take for granted a level of commercialization of television that was internationally uncommon at the time of its ‘Network Era’. This was highlighted by many European analyses of change in the industry from the late 1980s, when liberalization and privatization removed some of the sharp distinc- tions between television markets on each side of the Atlantic. New Zealand’s early television system was a state monopoly until the late 1980s, like so many in Eu- rope; Australia’s was a ‘dual system’, combining three- commercial-station competition in the largest four cit- ies with a publicly-funded national broadcaster.

Third, Australia’s three commercial stations took a long time to generate the truly national commercial networks that quickly characterized US TV. Restrictions in place until the late 1980s on the numbers of stations in non-metropolitan markets and on common owner- ship meant that even the national capital, Canberra, just 300km from Sydney, had only one commercial sta- tion for around 30 years. Television’s reach was limited by a combination of politics, economics and geogra- phy—topography in New Zealand’s case, distance in Australia’s—and ‘equalising’ access to the same ser- vices as city-dwellers became a durable policy issue. Satellite technology was transformational, and not just in delivering TV to remote households for the first time. In Australia, the debate about how to use it to expand TV services drove a fundamental overhaul of regulation that precipitated significant structural change in the industry and finally allowed the creation of fully national commercial networks.

Fourth, both countries created publicly-funded broadcasters, separate from their well-established na- tional broadcasters, to reflect and shape their nations’ distinctive cultural origins and diversity. Australia’s, the SBS, came first, beginning regular TV broadcasts in 1980,

and was followed by a National Indigenous Television service in 2007 that became part of SBS in 2012. New Zealand’s Maori Television began broadcasting in 2004.

Fifth, Australia and New Zealand came later to mul- tichannel subscription television than the US, Australia much later. Having arrived early at US-style three- commercial station competition in the largest cities in the mid–1960s, Australia’s incumbent broadcasters successfully resisted the introduction of multichannel competition until 1995. This did not simply defer a ‘Multichannel Transition’, because other changes, such as the arrival of commercial internet services and the DVD format, still occurred in the mid/late 1990s as in the US. Cable and satellite television faced much more competition and only ever reached around 50% of households in New Zealand and just 30% in Australia, where tough ‘anti-siphoning’ rules also prevented pay TV channels acquiring exclusive rights to a long list of the most popular sporting events. This was nothing like the almost universal take-up it achieved in the US—it remained a premium service rather than becoming a utility—and changed the opportunities and challenges posed by subsequent developments. Digital TV services offered most Australian viewers their first multichannel TV experience; digital TV switchover was especially sensitive because so many TV viewers still relied on over-the-air transmission; online subscription video services did not require consumers to cut or shave cords—most did not have one—but to pay for ‘televi- sion’ for the first time.

In summary, while there is plenty in the US phases that is recognizable in Australia’s and New Zealand’s television history, especially the long, gradual shift from network or station control towards increasing viewer choice and a wider range of viewing and using practices, there is also plenty that is distinctive, espe- cially about the timing of events that involved govern- ment action (the expansion of services and technical changes like colour and digital TV), and therefore the precise combination of factors in play at any time. These have given rise to unique TV systems and prac- tices that shape the possibilities enabled by emerging technologies, enterprises, behaviours and ideas. They prompt a slightly different question to whether or not television is ending: that is whether, in the Post Net- work, TiVo-to-YouTube, Post TV, Post Broadcast, digital era, these distinctions will endure, narrow, dissolve, or morph into new forms of difference. This article tries to answer this question by analysing the pre-history, launch and response to Netflix’s arrival in A/NZ and contrasting it with the introduction of digital TV in the early 2000s. The emphasis on Netflix highlights the role of drama programming in television’s future; the dis- cussion of digital TV reminds us that drama is just one part of what television has been and might be in the future.

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 112

2. The Netflix Moment

2.1. Noticing Netflix

Netflix was noticed in Australia and New Zealand as soon as a significant number of customers started sign- ing up to the mail order subscription DVD rental busi- ness launched in the United States in September 1999 (Netflix, 2003). Helpfully, one was the brother-in-law of a Sydney Morning Herald journalist, giving the Califor- nia start-up a distant Australian influencer: “Netflix is a delicious service that could work here given Australia Post’s express mail service, and my hope is that if I keep talking about it someone will pick up on the idea” (Easdown, 2002). Across the Tasman Sea in New Zea- land, a 35-year-old IT consultant tried to do just that. Netflix declined his request to establish a local fran- chise, so he launched his own DVD rental business, fat- so.co.nz, in July 2004.

Rejecting such overtures, the young Netflix deter- mined and revealed its strategy for any future overseas expansion. The company was not ‘born global’; it was local but with global aspirations. ‘Born Globals’, accord- ing to one contemporary definition, “seek out interna- tional business through the application of resources to the sale of output in multiple countries within three years’ of…establishment” (Li, G. Qian, & Z. Qian, 2012). Netflix did not do this, but once it did pursue interna- tional markets, it aimed to be a truly global operator rather than a US-based business with international franchises or affiliates. This meant its strategies for ac- quiring and eventually commissioning programming would have disruptive implications for a business that was overwhelmingly territorial. “[W]e are kind of alone in the space of buying [global] rights”, said chief con- tent officer Ted Sarandos in December 2015. “It’s a pretty big change and at the end of the day it’s a real structural change” (Sarandos, 2015).

Many similar online DVD services were established in Australia and New Zealand in the early 2000s. Like Netflix, they were initially seen mainly as challengers to bricks-and-mortar DVD stores. Their names self- identified most as film services at a time before the boom in TV programming on DVD. (In 2003, 70% of DVD sales revenues in Australia were for movies and just 13% for TV series—the rest was mainly music, chil- dren’s and documentaries. See GfK/Screen Australia, 2015). An internet entrepreneur founded Webflicks in Australia in 2002; Movieshack started in Auckland and Quickflix in Perth in 2004. Some TV operators took stakes in the emerging sector. New Zealand’s satellite subscription TV incumbent, Sky TV, acquired an online DVD start-up, DVD Unlimited, around the time Fatso was founded. Major A/NZ cinema exhibitor Hoyts, then controlled by Australia’s most powerful TV broadcaster Kerry Packer, launched Homescreen in 2003, arguing it was “a natural extension of the company’s film and

cinema business” (Groves, 2003). Telcos got involved as well: Australia’s Telstra established fetchmemovies in 2004, then rebadged it with their ISP brand, as Big- Pond Movies; Optus entered into a marketing ar- rangement with Quickflix (Best, 2004).

Also like Netflix, A/NZ DVD mail order services gen- erally saw their technology and distribution process as transitional, a first move into a business that would eventually shift to online digital delivery (see Keating, 2013, p. 48). Netflix started a streaming service in the US in 2007 which it extended to Canada in 2010 and Latin America and the Caribbean the following year. The telcos, especially, saw online video as a big oppor- tunity. Telstra’s BigPond sold its DVD mail order busi- ness to Quickflix in 2011 after launching online stream- ing and downloads. Quickflix started its own digital service in Australia in 2011 (Curtis, Given, & McCutch- eon, 2012, p. 31) then launched as a digital-only service in New Zealand the following year (Pullar-Strecker, 2012). Online video was where so many media, com- munications and IT businesses seemed to be converg- ing—as well as the telcos and TV operators, online vid- eo services were launched or announced by local DVD retailers and cinema exhibitors, as well as international search and consumer device giants. Google acquired YouTube in 2006 and launched separate Australian and New Zealand versions of the site in 2007 (infonewsNZ, 2007). Apple launched the iTunes Australian music store in October 2005, added television programs to it in June 2008 and a film catalogue in August 2008.

Unlike the US, where the first mover Netflix estab- lished itself as the market leader first in online DVD rentals and then in subscription streaming, the early online DVD enterprises in A/NZ consolidated and many investors sold out. New Zealand’s three merged in 2008 into a company controlled by Sky TV but trading under the Fatso brand (Scott, 2008). Homescreen was sold to Quickflix in 2005 and the latter’s ownership went through many changes. Lachlan Murdoch’s Illyria and the regional TV network WIN bought in then sold out; HBO did the same in 2012, selling to Nine Entertain- ment Corporation, owner of the Nine TV network. Each of these seemed to be preparing to use Quickflix’s busi- ness as their vehicle for entering the A/NZ video stream- ing market, before settling on another route. Some speculated that Netflix itself would do that; like the oth- ers, it seems to have decided it could win the customers without having to pay for them (Kohler, 2015).

2.2. Watching Netflix

Once Netflix launched its streaming service in the Unit- ed States in 2007, technically literate overseas custom- ers started subscribing to it using virtual private net- works (VPNs) that masked their location. Without launching a global service, Netflix became a global en- terprise. This cross-border ‘pre-history’, lasting until

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 113

the formal launch of Netflix in Australia and New Zea- land in March 2015, had precedents. New Zealanders listened fortuitously to Australian long wave radio sta- tions in the 1920s until the wavelengths used in Aus- tralia were changed to enable more local stations to be licensed and to improve listening quality. Canadians liv- ing along the US border watched American television well before the CBC commenced TV services in Quebec and Toronto in 1952; some in Ireland received BBC TV signals for fifteen years after its post-war relaunch, be- fore RTE officially started TV in the Republic. In each case, broadcasting acquired a national identity that was not intrinsic to the technology. The official begin- nings of TV are generally remembered as the moments when a national operator commenced transmission in- side the territory. More accurately, these pre-histories demonstrate the technical, political, economic, geo- graphic and cultural contingencies of the official insti- tutional forms.

Such transnational contingencies also had counter- parts within nations. To Sydney’s north and south, many homes in Newcastle and Wollongong retain the tall external antennae erected to receive TV from Syd- ney stations before local ones launched in the early 1960s. They continued to be used for the nearly three decades that non-metropolitan centres had only one commercial station while Sydney had three. A young Rupert Murdoch bought into the commercial TV sta- tion in Wollongong, about 90km south of Sydney, in 1963, intending to use its signal overlap to broadcast to a large proportion of Sydney viewers. Already a deal- making opportunist, he settled for a 25% stake in one of the Sydney licensees instead! Tensions like these had popular, commercial and policy consequences. Local sta- tions got big audiences for local news programs but not for the foreign programs their audiences had already seen on the Sydney channels, leading to tussles with overseas program suppliers (Herd, 2012, pp. 102-104).

The unofficial availability and official unavailability of Netflix in A/NZ from 2007 became a significant part of a wider struggle about pricing and access to media con- tent and the quality of broadband infrastructure. Con- sumer group CHOICE commissioned research that found 340,000 Australian households were accessing Netflix in November 2014, four months before its official launch, and nearly 700,000 were subscribing to at least one overseas content provider or buying direct through an overseas store like iTunes USA. (CHOICE, 2014) Even months after the service launched officially in A/NZ, “tens of thousands” of New Zealanders were believed to be accessing the US version of the service, according to an unattributed estimate (Pullar-Strecker, 2015a).

Netflix’ low cost highlighted the premium pricing strategies of the near-monopoly cable and satellite TV operators in the two territories, Foxtel and Sky, and the lack of flexibility in their channel bundles. The prices of IT hardware and software products from international

vendors like Apple, Microsoft and Adobe were the tar- get of a 2013 parliamentary committee inquiry which found that Australians often paid 50%–100% more for the same products than their counterparts in compa- rable economies. “Particularly when it comes to digital- ly delivered content…many IT products are more ex- pensive in Australia because of regional pricing strategies implemented by major vendors and copy- right holders. Consumers often refer to these pricing strategies as the ‘Australia tax’.” (House of Representa- tives Standing Committee on Infrastructure and Com- munications, 2013, p. viii) Already aware of delays be- tween US and A/NZ TV transmission dates, especially for big US drama series, unofficial access to the US Net- flix service gave viewers a more legitimate way besides unauthorised P2P file-sharing for getting timely access to at least some titles. Broadcasters and the cable and satellite operators responded with ‘Express from the US’ scheduling, and made episodes of marquee series available online at strange hours, as soon as they had screened overseas, such as the ABC did with Series 7 of Doctor Who in 2012 (Kidman, 2012). Large public in- vestments in fixed line broadband were announced by both the Australian and New Zealand governments in 2009 (Given, 2010) but a Netflix executive told a 2011 conference in Auckland that poor household take-up of fast broadband was one of the reasons his company had not launched a service there (Gruenwedel, 2011).

In all these debates, Netflix was often represented as a liberator for far-away consumers. “It is remarkable that a service which is officially blocked to Australi- ans…and doesn’t spend a cent on local marketing…is the biggest single driver of competition in our enter- tainment market”, said a spokesperson for CHOICE. “It’s a perfect case study of how competition from in- ternational markets can shake up protected industries and deliver benefits for Australian consumers” (CHOICE, 2014). Yet, from many perspectives, the Cali- fornia-based company was a surprising saviour. Digital consumers had criticised record companies and sub- scription TV operators for bundling content into al- bums and channel packages that forced consumers to buy things they didn’t want along with those they did. The unbundling of songs, movies and TV shows by iTunes had been welcomed, but the celebration was brief: now Netflix, like Spotify in music, was attracting customers with all-you-can-eat monthly subscriptions, though at much lower price-points than multichannel subscription TV operators. Netflix was not the long- promised digital fantasy, Paul Goldstein’s ‘celestial jukebox’ (2003), offering all the video content ever made, but a carefully chosen collection. The collection was large, certainly, but just as important were the company’s skills at directing subscribers around it and learning from their choices. Like other members of a large chorus of over-the-top (OTT) service providers, Netflix lamented the state of fixed line broadband in

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 114

Australia and New Zealand that disappointed video consumers, but its solution was not to invest in that crucial element of its delivery infrastructure, but to support the heavy public investments proposed by governments and their taxpayers.

One of the factors that seems to have appealed most about Netflix to many consumers was that it was a new entrant into these distant markets (see Pash, 2014). It was not one of the local mainstream media incumbents, those products of decades of policy that had been de- signed to make national media systems distinctive, but who were now increasingly blamed for the fact that those national media systems were not delivering an identikit of services available elsewhere. Of those in- cumbent ‘dinosaurs’, probably the most criticised—the titanosaurs—were the broadcast television networks.

2.3. Anticipating Netflix

Netflix’ structure and business model for delivering video online was quite different to the TV networks and most other incumbent A/NZ video providers. It was a standalone business and it charged for its con- tent. A 2012 analysis of 25 video-heavy websites pop- ular with Australian internet users (Curtis et al., 2012) noted the overwhelming majority offered content without direct charge to consumers. These ‘free’ ser- vices were funded by advertising, public funding (na- tional broadcaster sites), cross-subsidy from other ac- tivities or a combination.

Most were controlled by entities with other inter- ests, so the online video services were part of wider business strategies. Eight were catch-up sites con- trolled by Australian-based broadcasters, eleven were controlled by other kinds of media and communica- tions enterprises and just six were standalone online video operations. Two of the broadcasters operated their online presence in partnership with US-based companies, Yahoo! (Seven) and Microsoft (Nine). Of the other kinds of media and communications enter- prises, major US technology companies were promi- nent—Google (YouTube and Google Video, which was subsequently effectively integrated into YouTube), Ap- ple (iTunes), Amazon (IMDb), Microsoft (Bing Video and the stake in ninemsn, subsequently restructured as Mi9, wholly owned by Nine Entertainment Corporation, but retaining a relationship with Microsoft technology and advertising products) and InterActiveCorp (Vimeo). Two were international production and distribution compa- nies, Disney and FremantleMedia (controlling the Neighbours program site); two were telecommunica- tions companies, Australia’s Telstra (BigPond Movies) and France Telecom-Orange (which sold a controlling stake in Daily Motion to Vivendi in 2015); and one was the A/NZ newspaper company Fairfax Media (SMH TV). Of the six standalone operations, three were P2P Bit- Torrent sites (each undergoing significant change

since), two were the video sharing and search sites MetaCafe and Blinkx, and the other was Quickflix.

The study did not include Netflix, which was still three years from launching an official Australian ser- vice. For a time, some suggested it was doing well enough from VPN customers without the expense of launching an official service, certainly well enough for the incumbents to feel they needed to respond. In New Zealand, Sky and the dominant broadcast network, the still state-owned TVNZ, launched a joint pay–TV-lite service, Igloo TV, in late 2012 (Keall, 2012), and online subscription video services were launched in 2014 by Sky (Neon) and the telco Spark (Lightbox) (Slabbert, 2014). In Australia, subscription TV operator Foxtel launched the Presto online movie service in March 2014, halved its price in August, brought in Seven West Media (which owns the top-rating Seven Network) as a partner in December, and added TV programs to it in January 2015. Free-to-air TV rival Nine Entertainment joined with Fairfax Media in August 2014 to announce the online video service Stan, and launched it on Aus- tralia Day, 26 January 2015.

Netflix finally ended the rumours in November 2014, confirming it would start the service in Australia and New Zealand that began on 24 March 2015. Sever- al industry representatives interviewed around this time for a study of the future of TV predicted consoli- dation in the sector. Said Overture Management’s Ben Liebmann (ex-Shine360):

“No matter what the local providers can throw at it, Netflix has deeper pockets. It has global scale, and it has time. While it may not have the most extraordi- nary content offering on day one, it can wait, and sit it out till broadcast and pay TV rights come up and then it can swoop. At some point I suspect there will be Netflix and probably one other. And the one other will be a great competitor because it will eventually have Seven, Nine, Ten, ABC, SBS, Foxtel, all in one.” (Given, Brealey, & Gray, 2015, p. 24)

2.4. Launching Netflix

Two features of Netflix’s launch in Australia and New Zealand in March 2015 provide striking contrasts with earlier phases in television history. First, official TV ser- vices started in New Zealand several years after Aus- tralia’s in 1956; Netflix launched simultaneously in the two territories, an implicit recognition of an increasing- ly shared cross-Tasman audio-visual marketplace. The- atrical distributors have licensed A/NZ rights together for decades, the major cinema chains operate in both markets, Sky News delivers a 24-hour news channel to both markets, and the biggest New Zealand and Aus- tralian newspapers are all owned by Fairfax, News Lim- ited and APN, which also controls commercial radio networks in the two countries.

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 115

Second, Netflix was an outsider. The technology of broadcast television was first deployed by local and na- tional media incumbents—in NZ, the BCNZ; in Austral- ia, the ABC and commercial companies in Sydney and Melbourne formed by the major newspapers. New Zealand had welcomed TV outsiders soon after private TV services were first authorized in the late 1980s. The Canadian CanWestGlobal bought into TV3 and eventu- ally acquired 100% of it in 1997, the same year a com- pany controlled by Rupert Murdoch’s News Corpora- tion acquired a controlling stake in the satellite subscription TV operator, Sky, from the American me- dia (Time Warner, TCI) and telecoms (Bell Atlantic, Ameritech) companies that founded it (Withers, 1997). In Australia, almost all the later expansions of televi- sion services had also been delivered by incumbents. These included colour TV in the 1970s, extra services in country areas in the late 1980s and early 1990s, and digital TV in the 2000s, as discussed below. Even multi- channel subscription TV services, initially offered by the entrant Australis in 1995, had consolidated into Foxtel, controlled by the biggest local telco Telstra and biggest newspaper publisher, Murdoch’s News Limited.

Yet, like television itself in the late 1950s and 1960s, already an international phenomenon when it launched officially in A/NZ, Netflix was a known outsider. By No- vember 2014, it had more than 50 million streaming cus- tomers in the US and overseas, including the VPN sub- scribers in A/NZ discussed above. The company’s first program commissions, House of Cards and Orange Is the New Black, had screened on other television and video services in Australia and New Zealand and were well known as Netflix shows. This time, offering the next generation of TV services, A/NZ incumbents were the start-ups trying to create awareness for new brands in their own backyards: “The outsider, Netflix, was already at home” (Given, Brealey, & Gray, 2015, pp. 6-7).

Also like the introduction of television, although Netflix seemed to be known, the versions that Australi- ans and New Zealanders got to see were not the same as the one they thought they knew. Licensing deals al- ready in place meant some of the marquee content available to Netflix subscribers in other countries was not available to early A/NZ customers. This even in- cluded some Netflix-commissioned shows, where exist- ing series had been licensed exclusively to local sub- scription TV operators, leading to considerable confusion about where viewers would find forthcoming series. Some recent Disney and Marvel programs that were part of Netflix’ Australian service could not be screened in New Zealand because Sky TV held the rele- vant rights (Pullar-Strecker, 2015b). It would take time for the official, local Netflix’s to look like the US or UK Netflix that many had been subscribing to via VPNs, but also for the reality of Netflix’s wide and deep but not infinite content offerings to be understood.

Historically, television services around the world

had diverged as revenues grew, local production skills developed, policy measures were implemented and took effect, and audiences revealed and learned dis- tinctive tastes. Netflix’s premise was that, as territorial licensing deals expired, its services around the world would converge towards a global service, satisfying the increasingly global tastes of local viewers.

2.5. Dealing with Netflix

Soon after Netflix launched, market researchers, finan- cial analysts and journalists began reporting “explosive adoption of the platform” and “stunning growth” (White, 2015). Here again was an urgent narrative about the end of television, founded in the arrival of a different kind of television. “Netflix is the new black”, declared Roy Morgan Research, estimating the compa- ny signed nearly 300,000 Australian customers in its first month, April 2015. In New Zealand, 164,000 households were estimated to be subscribing in the first three months, 9.4% of the roughly 1.75 million to- tal (Roy Morgan Research, 2015c). After seven months, Morgan estimated more than a million Australian households were subscribing, 11.4% of the 9 million to- tal (Roy Morgan Research, 2015b, 2015d). Broadband customers complained that their access speeds had slowed; telcos confirmed the surge in online video con- sumption (Bingemann, 2015).

It appeared clear enough that Netflix was signing up many more subscribers than its local SVOD rivals, Pres- to and Stan in Australia and Lightbox and Neon in New Zealand, although the battle for customers spawned a war over metrics. Mumbrella deputy editor Nic Chris- tensen thought the figures published by operators were “at best confusing and at worse close to mislead- ing”. Different SVOD providers cited ‘gross sign-ups’ (which included people who had churned or were on free trials), ‘total customers’ (which included TVOD customers who had bought a single movie as well as ongoing SVOD subscribers), ‘paying subscribers’ and ‘people using the service’ (paying subscribers multi- plied by the average number of people in households). Netflix, “the godfather of secrecy in this space”, pub- lished no breakdowns of its Australian and New Zea- land subscribers at all. “SVOD offers a level of targeted ad delivery that is unrivalled in traditional television” plus a lucrative side business trading the data, wrote Christensen. But for that to work, “unanimity about the metric” for subscription streaming and “basic level transparency” were essential. Christensen wanted ‘paying subscribers’ to acquire the same kind of univer- sal currency for SVOD services that ‘unique audience’ and ‘time spent’ metrics had acquired for AVOD (ad- supported VOD) services like YouTube and catch-up TV. The fact that most SVOD services did not carry adver- tising was not a reason for accepting spurious audience data: “While it may not be part of their immediate

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 116

business plans…at some point the sheer weight of money being offered by advertisers will be too great” (Christensen, 2015).

The good news for video service providers was that some of the SVOD customers were paying for televi- sion for the first time. In Australia, where household penetration of cable and satellite subscription TV had been stuck at around 30% of households for years, over 40% had signed up to some kind of subscription video service, including cable or satellite TV or SVOD, a few months after Netflix launched (Roy Morgan Re- search, 2015b). The bad news for incumbent subscrip- tion and broadcast TV operators was a significant de- cline in television viewing, especially linear viewing. Australia’s TV ratings provider reported that ‘total TV screen use’ for all Australians fell nearly three-and-a- half hours (from an average of 123 hours 43 minutes to 120 hours 19 minutes per month) between the third quarter of 2014 and the same period in 2015—live TV viewing fell around 6 hours, playback rose 11 minutes and ‘other screen use’ rose 2 hours 18 minutes (OzTAM, RegionalTAM, Nielsen, 2015).

Roy Morgan Research CEO Michele Levine specu- lated that the media behaviour of 14–24 year-olds “may foreshadow the wider norms ten years from now”, noting the average time this age group spent with TV, radio and print media a decade ago resembled the wider national norm in 2015. According to her da- ta, Australians aged 14–24 now spend more time online than with all other traditional media combined: 27.6 hours on average each week using the internet (much more than the 17.9 hours spent by all Australi- ans aged 14+), 12.5 hours a week with TV (much less than the 18.8 hours spent by all Australians 14+), 6.7 hours with radio (12.8 hours for all 14+) and less than an hour and half with newspapers or magazines (3.4 hours) (Roy Morgan Research, 2015a).

Citi Research analyst Justin Diddams predicted that more Australian households would be subscribing to an SVOD service within three years than to the 20-year old dominant subscription TV company Foxtel. This didn’t mean “the death of Foxtel but it means an explosion in content consumption…in the 70 per cent of households that don’t pay anything today”. Nor did it mean free-to- air television was dying, but growth in broadcasters’ earnings was likely to be limited, because “expensive, risky, cutting-edge content” would be needed to keep their linear channels relevant (White, 2015; White & McIntyre, 2015a, 2015b). The local SVOD services an- nounced they would commission more local programs (Bodey, 2015); departing ABC managing director Mark Scott called for debate about the idea of “a digital con- tent fund, requiring new digital content companies, many of which dwarf their Australian competitors, to contribute a percentage of revenue to support local con- tent requirements” (Scott, 2015); Netflix announced it was backing a TV series to be directed by Australian Baz

Luhrmann (The Great Gatsby, Australia, Moulin Rouge!, Romeo+Juliet), about 1970s New York. It would be “a mythic saga of how New York at the brink of bankruptcy gave birth to hip-hop, punk and disco—told through the lives and music of the South Bronx kids who changed the city, and the world…forever” (Stanhope, 2015).

3. The Digital Moment

Digital television technology was expected to change television forever and did, though not in precisely the ways many anticipated. It originated in efforts to im- prove TV’s image quality. The only way to achieve the improvements sought within the constraints of existing channel allocations was to use digital techniques. By using them, many other possibilities were created, with both revolutionary and evolutionary capabilities and consequences. For TV broadcasters, there were threats as well as opportunities. If digital TV was a revolution and TV-as-we-knew-it was going to end, it was hard for broadcasters to argue that they should be the only en- terprises able to use the technology. If it was an evolu- tion, a technical upgrade to a well-established medium that would not fundamentally transform it, it might be difficult to expect governments to offer regulatory fa- vours and subsidies to help make it happen.

In the late 1990s, digital TV pioneers emphasized the capacity for it to put television in the centre of the digital revolution that garnered so much attention af- ter Netscape’s 1995 initial public offering. Digital transmission was widely described as the most im- portant development in television since the medium was introduced. In the UK, one of the first countries to launch the technology in 1998, an early policy paper said it would provide many people with “their first ex- perience of the full potential of the information super- highways” (Department of National Heritage, 1995, p. 1). Australia’s communications minister promised this “quantum leap in television technology” would provide the capacity “for the humble television set to become a central information point in every home” (Alston, 1998). (End-of-television narratives often recall eras when TV sets were ‘humble’!)

After the telecoms and internet crash in 2000, the collapse of ITV Digital in the UK in 2002, and the disap- pointing early take-up of digital TV in some territories including the US, Sweden, Finland and Australia (see Starks, 2013, pp. 42-51), the evolutionary nature of dig- ital TV transmission was emphasized more strongly. Announcing New Zealand’s plans for digital TV in 2006, a decade after Britain’s, the broadcasting minister said the move to digital television was “essential to securing the future viability of free-to-air broadcasting in New Zealand”, and the continuing strength of public broad- casting’s place in it (Maharey, 2006). TV would change, but modestly. Any larger transformations would come from what was done with spectrum vacated by broad-

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 117

casters. By the time switchover was completed in Aus- tralia and New Zealand at the end of 2013, it was diffi- cult to get anyone to notice. Digital TV was just TV.

Yet TV, plainly, was not what it had been. Australi- ans and New Zealanders had replaced their TV sets and chosen to watch the increased range of free-to-air channels on wide-screen receivers with much better image and sound quality. Given the relative sizes of the advertising markets and government budgets, Australi- ans got many more new ad-supported and public- funded channels than New Zealand (Given & Norris, 2010): by November 2014, free-to-air digital multichan- nels achieved a share of more than a quarter of the Aus- tralian viewing audience from 6p.m. to midnight, com- pared with about 56% for the main channels and 17% for subscription TV channels (OzTAM, 2014). Many more households in both countries came to rely on satellite signals for their TV reception, because both govern- ments decided to subsidise multichannel satellite pack- ages. This enabled them to reduce the number of terres- trial TV transmission sites and hence frequencies used and so increase the amount of spectrum vacated, the ‘digital dividend’. Australia’s early emphasis on HDTV and the rapid fall in prices of HD sets meant that a very high proportion of the receivers sold were capable of re- ceiving HD signals, although the wholesale transition to HD programming, even in genres like sport, has not oc- curred. New Zealand’s later start meant it could use the DVB-T2 transmission standard from the outset; Australia anticipates a further migration to that standard.

Despite the significance of these changes, as in oth- er territories, digital broadcasting and the first genera- tion of digital TV receivers in A/NZ did not themselves generate the kinds of changes to television through in- teractivity, convergence with other media forms, and mobile reception that were part of the early rationales for digital TV. These things all occurred, but not so much within the incumbent TV business as outside it or around its edges. TV viewers interacted with TV content and each other, but they generally used SMS and then social media rather than the ‘red button’ interactivity that digi- tal television enabled. They integrated amateur and pro- fessionally-produced content, but were more likely to do it using desktop and laptop computers, smartphones and tablets, than TV sets. They increasingly watched vid- eo content on mobile devices, but trials of mobile broadcasting services using transmission standards like DVB-H did not prove popular. Rather than being in the centre of the digital revolution, as the digital TV industry and policy pioneers had enthused, broadcast television was, to some extent, overrun by it, even as it has adopt- ed digital tools throughout its production, distribution, transmission, sales and marketing activities.

The scale of that overrunning, at least in the eyes of investors, is demonstrated by the stock prices of televi- sion companies in the region. Shares in Australia’s Number 3 commercial network, Network Ten, worth

around $2.50 a decade ago, ended 2015 at less than 20 cents (they were consolidated, 1 for 10, in January 2016). Seven West Media, owner of the top-rating Sev- en Network, hit a post-GFC low of AU$4 in 2009 before strengthening, but were back down below 80 cents in late 2015. The Nine Network was recapitalized in a new company floated in 2013; the shares ended 2015 below their issue price. The gloom was not restricted to broadcast networks. Multichannel subscription opera- tor Sky TV’s shares fell below NZ$4.50 in December 2015 after reaching nearly NZ$7 in July 2014 (Murdoch sold out in 2013). Broadcast television’s commercial decline was also reflected in the long, gentle easing of the once-seemingly-unassailable political power that helped it to call so many of the policy shots in the de- bates about digital TV. Some anticipated the complete shutdown of analogue TV and vacating of large amounts of spectrum for alternate purposes would simply lead to new spectrum demands by the old incumbents. Re- quests were made, but the Australian and New Zealand governments resisted them. Generous ‘digital dividends’ were engineered, broadcasters shut down the last of their analogue transmitters in December 2013, the va- cated spectrum was re-auctioned, and the mobile broadband companies that acquired it launched more affordable, higher bandwidth services that inspired and helped manage surging mobile video consumption.

The devices many consumers used to watch mobile video, beginning with the iPhone launched in 2007 and joined by smartphones from other suppliers and later tablets, gave concrete expression to the “alternate us- es of vacated spectrum” that figured prominently in debates about the benefits of digital TV switchover. That the spectrum once used for ‘television’ was rede- ployed for ‘non-television’ purposes in which incum- bent television broadcasters had such a direct interest confirmed James Bennett’s observation that digital TV switchover, based on “a traditional understanding of television as the ‘box in the corner’ [a]rguably…tell[s] us only half the story”. Digital TV was not just TV. “Televi- sion as digital media must be understood as a non-site- specific, hybrid cultural and technological form that spreads across multiple platforms” (Bennett, 2011, p. 2).

As a “non-site-specific, hybrid cultural and techno- logical form”, digital television followed the interna- tional experience of analogue television before it. “Fig- ures from official switchover programs…call our attention not only to some of the not-so-radical shifts that television’s digitization engenders, but also to the fact that such transformations occur within specific na- tional and local configurations”, writes Bennett. The broad policy agenda was global—introduce digital transmission, eventually shutdown analogue and real- locate the spectrum for alternate purposes—but the precise policy elements were regional, national and lo- cal. “Although a variety of international contexts might all promote the digital switchover by emphasizing the

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 118

benefits that digital TV will bring consumers…and gov- ernments…the experience of digital TV differs greatly according to geography, but also to economic and cul- tural factors that speak to the role television has played in defining modernity” (Bennett, 2011, p. 3).

Analysing digital TV policy in the UK and the US, Hernan Galperin found little evidence that these nation states had yielded their capacity to shape their com- munications sectors to “the twin forces of technologi- cal change and globalisation” (Galperin, 2004, p. 272). Despite claims of global convergence in the regulation of media and telecoms industries towards ‘common rules based on free market principles’, he concluded:

“Faced with common macroeconomic challenges and a technology that challenged the fundamental parameters of the analog[ue] TV regime, nations forged distinct policy responses that in many ways strengthened their pre-existing differences in the organisation of broadcasting.….Such resilience of national media systems should not be surprising. In a sense, our modernist fascination with technology often obscures the fact that, while technological in- novations are universal and rather easily transfera- ble across borders, the economic and political ar- rangements that define how these innovations are deployed are not.…Whereas many globalisation scholars would predict a gradual vanishing of histor- ical differences in the organisation of media sys- tems across nations—what the more alarmist of them would associate with an irreversible trend toward worldwide cultural homogenisation—we find that the transition to digital TV has been a ve- hicle for cementing those differences….[T]he future of television seems less wedded to the evolution of technology or global market forces than to politics, as usual.” (Galperin, 2004, pp. 275-276, 285-287)

Galperin’s conclusion is convincing for international policies about digital TV, but, so far, is less persuasive for the present ‘end of television’ moment, the introduction of streaming video services. It may even be less persua- sive for policies at the end of the digital TV transition than it was for those at the start. Australia and New Zea- land launched digital TV years apart in 2001 and 2008; they switched off their last analogue transmitters in the same month, December 2013. Netflix launched in both markets simultaneously 15 months later.

This may be scant evidence or simply a reflection of the increasing closeness of the two countries’ econo- mies over the three decades since they established what is now one of the most liberal free trade regions in the world. But it may also reflect significant shifts in the nature of some of the brands, services and devices that have risen to prominence since the Dot Com crash in the early 2000s. NBC and CBS did not operate ser- vices in Australia or New Zealand and were never sig-

nificant brands there. So discrete were the national markets that Australia and the US could both have large ABC’s that were completely separate organisa- tions. International brands existed in media and com- munications—Hollywood studios like MGM, movie franchises like James Bond, stars from Charlie Chaplin to Steve McQueen, Nellie Melba to Madonna—but rarely for broadcasters or communications companies, unless they had imperial origins like the BBC and Cable & Wireless. Now, Apple, Amazon, Google, Facebook and Netflix are major retail brands in A/NZ and throughout much of the world. They all have millions of regular overseas customers who expect they will be able to continue to use the services when they travel internationally—a practice much more common than it was even two decades ago. Netflix’s Ted Sarandos promotes the idea that no matter where a subscriber signs up, “when you push play [Netflix] works every- where in the world on all different broadband speeds on all different devices” (Sarandos, 2015). Mobile de- vices travel around the world with their owners in ways that TV and radio sets rarely did, and need to connect seamlessly to mobile and wifi networks using several frequency bands. Different receivers have long been manufactured to suit incompatible electrical power and transmission standards; smartphones and other mobile devices are much more likely to incorporate multiple standards in models that can be manufac- tured, sold and used anywhere. Regional and global harmonisation of the frequency bands used for particu- lar services and devices helps to reduce their cost, hence the intense work Australia put into developing the Asia Pacific Telecommunity (APT) plan for the 700 MHz band vacated by the shutdown of analogue TV in many countries (Australian Communications and Media Authority, 2015). To undersell these developments, while emphasising the intricate government policy ma- noeuvres about digital switchover, risks mistaking ac- tivity for impact. As Lotz notes of the US, most of the changes in industry operation that she discusses in The Television will be Revolutionised did not result from the competition that regulatory change was supposed to inspire; “instead they came largely from the actions of…consumer electronics and computing…companies outside the [regulator’s] purview” (Lotz, 2014, p. 52). Netflix is the exemplar of this trend.

The largely domestic identity of the enterprises that dominated national broadcasting systems and debates about digital TV in the 1990s and early 2000s was not an accident, it was policy. National governments creat- ed national public broadcasters and, even in the US, prohibited or limited foreign ownership of broadcast- ing enterprises. In the US, the companies that have come to dominate online music, books, video, search and social media since then are also domestic, often headquartered in the same state that still houses some of the giants of the movie and broadcasting businesses.

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 119

In A/NZ markets, the same California-based companies dominate digital services, but, unlike the TV broadcast- ers, they are distant. This may prove to be an outcome of some cultural consequence. In his book about Jim Clark, a co-founder of Silicon Graphics, Netscape and Healtheon/WebMD, one of the most engaging chroni- clers of commerce in the digital age, Michael Lewis, wrote “The business of creating and foisting new tech- nology upon others that goes on in Silicon Valley is near the core of the American experience. It is distinc- tively us” (Lewis, 2000, p. xii).

4. Conclusions

For the TV 2025 study referred to earlier, interviewees were asked if, in 2025, there would there still be some- thing we call ‘television’. Intel’s Tawny Schlieski re- sponded “TV for me is episodic content in our home. It’s a unique form that breaks away from the plays and movies that preceded it. It provides us with characters and continuity that we want to invite into our intimate spaces over and over again. That isn’t going any- where.” Joshua Green, from Arnold Worldwide, co- author of YouTube (2007) and Spreadable Media (2013), thought, “Television has trodden the edge of significant revolution its entire life. It has never been static. I think it’s got at least another decade in it.” “Consumers will still call it TV”, said AOL Platforms’s Mitch Waters, “but whether people in our [advertising] industry will view it that way, I’m not sure”. “As a de- vice and as a medium,” said Yahoo!7’s Arul Baskaran, “I think television as we know it is going to disappear” (Given et al., 2015, p. 11).

Television in Australia and New Zealand did not end with digital transmission and it is not ending with Net- flix or Fetch TV, but nor is the new television simply television—as some have suggested Michael Wolff ar- gues, unfairly equating his recent title with his argu- ment (Wolff, 2015). In Australia, New Zealand and eve- rywhere else, television is and has been, in James Bennett’s phrase, a “hybrid media form” (Bennett, 2011, p. 7). It is what Milly Buonanno calls an “open medium…resistant both to theoretical imposition and to the empirical experience of fixed, essential and un- changing characteristics” (Buonanno, 2008, p. 41). Dis- agreements about the phases of its history in different parts of the world often reflect disagreements about the truth of this central proposition. There is no classic form of television, touched at some point in every TV market, away from which they are all now speeding. There is, instead, a set of technologies, social practices, cultural forms, industries, institutions, words and ideas that constantly transform, finding new shapes that sometimes embody features of old ones.

Digital TV, Fetch TV and Netflix offer different tele- vision futures. The policy-driven digital switchover pro- cess was intended to make incumbent broadcasters

central to the continuing structure of television in the two markets. The compelling reason for doing so was that it gave this most popular media form, the largest source of finance for local audio-visual production and a crucial contributor to cultural activity and understand- ing, the best chance to adapt to the transformations of the digital era. The risk was that broadcast networks would over-use the control to try to over-determine the outcome. Before the transition to all-digital transmission was complete, it was becoming clear that broadcasters had overplayed their hands, trying to do too much de- termining with the politicians who had played such a big part in crafting their medium, while adapting too little in the market place. They thought they were television, and for a long time they were. Right now they seem out of time. Many others can do what they do, and some of the biggest influences on their business are not just out of their hands but outside their places.

Fetch TV is one kind of response to the radical pluri- formity of contemporary television, from an enterprise that believes television will endure, though perhaps with a different moniker. It seeks to muster all the tel- evisions under a single service, bill and brand—the big screens in living rooms and the mobile screens in peo- ple’s hands, the channels, programs and user- generated content that is worth watching wherever it comes from, even the brands they crave, like Netflix. Fetch hopes that even if viewers and users stop talking about it as TV they won’t stop watching and interacting with it and recommending it to others.

At the time of writing, the most successful chal- lenge to television in A/NZ was coming from a compa- ny that talks up the end of television (Guthrie, 2015), but serves up a very specific form of it. Netflix offers drama, documentary and children’s shows, a much more limited range of genres than broadcast or linear subscription operators; it offers them for a monthly all- you-can-eat price; and it offers them on-demand. Ted Sarandos says they are not interested in news—“The newsgathering space…is fairly commoditized and not particularly in line with our on-demand model”. Nor are they especially interested in sport. “The leagues have all the pricing power in that business forever [but] if there was a model where we could create our own sports league that might be interesting.” Further, “on- demand doesn’t make the sports experience better for the viewer. It’s the liveness of it” (Sarandos, 2015). Netflix is the opposite of Fetch. It is trying to be one kind of TV rather than all. Yet this constraint, this clari- ty of focus, does not imply fixity. The company has al- ready undergone several profound strategic shifts, first transforming itself from a DVD rental company in the US (though it still has DVD mail order customers) to an online digital provider, then from a domestic to an in- ternational service, then again from a reseller of other people’s content to a producer of its own (Keating, 2013). It is not just that the current SVOD business

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 120

model appears to be working, because it is not working well for others. Netflix’ A/NZ clone Quickflix moved ear- ly, adapted constantly and attracted many powerful supporters along the way: its shares were down from more than 20 cents in 2007 to just one cent in late 2015.

The political responses that Galperin would antici- pate are already apparent. Both New Zealand and Aus- tralia decided in 2015 to extend their value-added tax- es to “offshore intangible supplies”, ensuring that digital content services like Netflix and iTunes would have to charge the same VAT as their A/NZ-based competitors. Incumbents called it “levelling the playing field”; others called it the “Netflix tax”. While plainly prompted by the arrival of Netflix in 2015, the measures also made New Zealand and Australia early adopters of potentially global guidelines for business- to-consumer supplies of digital products and services being developed by the OECD (Sanyal, 2015). The Nine Network’s chief executive declared that without changes to Australian media laws, Netflix’s success in the local market would jeopardise Australian jobs and local programming. “Things are getting hairy amid in- creasing competition from overseas entrants”, he warned. Netflix employed just one person in Australia and no journalists, was taxed differently and, because it did not use spectrum, paid no licence fee like TV and radio broadcasters (Davidson & Crowe, 2016).

Painted as a homogenous global conduit, Netflix talked of accelerating the distinctiveness of the services it was launching in a dizzying number of countries. “I like to say we differentially understand the marketplace”, Sarandos told a UBS conference in December 2015. “I think every time we launch a new country we learn more about that region. There is very little that you can learn about operating in Australia by operating in Mexi- co.” He wanted “people to love Netflix because they love the programming on Netflix and if part of that means local language programming versus subtitled and dubbed shows then we want to be part of that as well. And I think we can, we have the scale to do that.” But so too, the company had found in Japan that whereas:

“90 per cent of the box office is Japanese film and 95 per cent of TV watching…is Japanese televi- sion…we are doing 30 to 50 per cent watching with non-Japanese programming….So I think that this very concentrated local viewing is more a reflection of the business climate than its local taste….The more international we are and the more global we are the more we can get better and better at that which I think is the next phase of film entertain- ment.” (Sarandos, 2015)

This is the paradox of TV after TV: the more successful this new, global form of television is, the greater will be its capacity to assume from local incumbents the role they reluctantly accepted decades ago, of distinguish-

ing their television from what was available elsewhere.

Acknowledgements

This article is part of an ARC Linkage Project “Spreading Fictions: Distributing Stories in the Online Age” (LP100200656) supported by the Australian Research Council, the Australian Broadcasting Corporation and Screen Australia—thanks to Georgie McClean, Richard Finlayson and Rebecca Heap. Thanks especially to Rosemary Curtis for the scale, range and quality of her research assistance on this article and throughout the project and to my co-authors on the TV 2025 report cited below, Michael Brealey and Cathy Gray. My col- league at Swinburne University, Ramon Lobato, and anonymous referees all provided helpful comments on an earlier draft—thanks to them as well.

Conflict of Interests

The author declares no conflict of interests.

References

Australian Communications and Media Authority. (2015, June 25). Global support grows for new 700 MHz spectrum plan. Retrieved from http://www.acma. gov.au/theACMA/global-support-grows-for-new-700 -mhz-spectrum-plan

Alston, R. (1998, April 8). Digital broadcasting a step closer. Media Release 56/98: Ministry for Communi- cations, the Information Economy and the Arts.

Bennett, J. (2011). Introduction: Television as digital me- dia. In J. Bennett & N. Strange (Eds.), Television as digital media (pp. 1-27). Durham and London: Duke University Press.

Best, P. (2004, December 4). DVDs to the door. Sydney Morning Herald, p. 16.

Bingemann, M. (2015, September 10). ‘Netflix effect’ is slowing the nation’s broadband internet speed. The Australian. Retrieved from http://www.theaustra lian.com.au/business/technology/netflix-effect-is-slo wing-the-nations-broadband-internet-speed/news- story/1ca3e44dd35ca8e4f7cdfcc16aafaec4

Bodey, M. (2015, August 3). Stan taps Aussie content in battle with Netflix. The Australian. p. 25.

Buonanno, M. (2008). The age of television: Experiences and theories (J. Radice Trans.). Bristol: Intellect.

Burgess, J., & Green, J. (2007) YouTube: Online video and participatory culture. Cambridge: Polity.

CHOICE (2014, November 21). 684 000 households are paying for content through international stores. Choice. Retrieved from https://www.choice.com.au/ about-us/media-releases/2014/november/684-000- households-are-paying-for-content-through-interna tional-stores

Christensen, N. (2015, September 9). Presto, Stan,

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 121

Quickflix: You need to come clean on your numbers before it’s too late. Mumbrella. Retrieved from http://mumbrella.com.au/presto-stan-quickflix-you- need-to-come-clean-on-your-numbers-before-its-too -late-316781

Curtis, R., Given, J., & McCutcheon, M. (2012). Online video in Australia: Exploring audiovisual fiction sites. Hawthorn: Swinburne University of Technology. Re- trieved from http://researchbank.swinburne.edu.au/ vital/access/manager/Repository/swin:26627

Davidson, D., & Crowe, D. (2016, 14 January). Netflix ‘a threat to locals’ without reforms. The Australian. pp. 1-2.

Department of National Heritage [DNH]. (1995). Digital terrestrial broadcasting: The government’s pro- posals. London: HMSO.

Easdown, R. (2002, December 30). The future of DVD rental. Sydney Morning Herald, p. 7.

Fell, L. (2011). Fetch TV: an incubation business for Asia. Telecommunications Journal of Australia, 61(4), pp. 56.1-56.9.

Galperin, H. (2004). New television, old politics: The tran- sition to digital TV in the United States and Britain. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

GfK Retail Technology Australia. (2015). Share of retail video (DVD and Blu-ray) sales value by type, 2000– 2014. Screen Australia. Retrieved from http://www. screenaustralia.gov.au/research/statistics/videopro ductsalesxtype.aspx

Given, J. (1998). The death of broadcasting? Media’s dig- ital future. Sydney: UNSW Press.

Given, J. (2003). Turning off the television: Broadcast- ing’s uncertain future. Sydney: UNSW Press.

Given, J. (2007). Switching off analogue TV. In A. T. Ken- yon (Ed.), TV futures: Digital television policy in Aus- tralia (pp. 277-314). Melbourne: Melbourne Univer- sity Press.

Given, J. (2010). Take your partners: Public private inter- play in Australian and New Zealand plans for next generation broadband. Telecommunications Policy, 34, pp. 540-549.

Given, J. (2015). Did it work? Evaluating the transition to digital TV in Australia. International Journal of Digital Television, 6(1), pp. 7-24.

Given, J., Brealey, M., & Gray, C. (2015). Television 2025: Rethinking small-screen media in Australia. Haw- thorn: Swinburne University of Technology. Re- trieved from http://apo.org.au/node/54739

Given, J., & Norris, P. (2010). Would the real Freeview please stand up? International Journal of Digital Tel- evision, 1(1), pp. 51-68.

Goldstein, P. (2003). Copyright’s highway: From Guten- berg to the celestial jukebox (Revised ed.). Stanford: Stanford University Press.

Groves, D. (2003, November 10). Downright netflixian. Video Business, p. 10.

Groves, D. (2015, May 20). Fetch TV rides the Netflix

wave. IF. Retrieved from http://if.com.au/2015/05/ 19/article/Fetch-TV-rides-the-Netflix-wave/APPCGEL WOG.html

Gruenwedel, E. (2015, January 26). ‘Globalflix’: Stream- ing pioneer Netflix seeks service in 200 countries and worldwide profitability by 2017. Home Media Maga- zine, p. 1.

Guthrie, S. (2015, September 23). Netflix CEO forecasts death of TV as we know it. The New Daily. Retrieved from http://thenewdaily.com.au/entertainment/201 5/09/23/netflix-ceo-forecasts-death-television

Herd, N. (2012). Networking: Commercial television in Australia. Strawberry Hills: Currency House.

House of Representatives Standing Committee on Infra- structure and Communications [HORSCIC]. (2013, Ju- ly). At what cost? IT pricing and the Australia Tax. Canberra: Parliament of Commonwealth of Australia.

InfonewsNZ. (2007, October 24). YouTube New Zealand launch. YouTube. Retrieved from www.youtube. com/watch?v=iHKkrd-1Nqc

Jenkins, H., Ford, S., & Green, J. (2013). Spreadable media: Creating value and meaning in a networked culture. New York and London: New York University Press.

Keall, C. (2012, 3 December). SkyTV, TVNZ finally launch Igloo. National Business Review. Retrieved from http://www.nbr.co.nz/opinion/sky-tv-tvnz-finally- launch-igloo

Keating, G. (2013). Netflixed: The epic battle for Ameri- ca’s eyeballs. New York: Portfolio/Penguin.

Kidman, A. (2012, August 28). ABC to broadcast Doctor Who on iView immediately after UK transmission. Lifehacker. Retrieved from http://www.lifehacker. com.au/2012/08/abc-to-broadcast-doctor-who-on- iview-immediately-after-uk-transmission

Kohler, A. (2015, April 2). The epic drama of Quickflix. Business Spectator. Retrieved from http://www.the australian.com.au/business/opinion/alan-kohler/the- epic-drama-of-quickflix/news-story/eb31c62b9029 5969de6547372ffbd2a1

Lewis, M. (2000). The new new thing: A Silicon Valley story. London: Coronet Books.

Li, L., Qian, G., & Qian, Z. (2012). Early internationaliza- tion and performance of small high-tech “born- globals”. International Marketing Review, 29(5), pp. 536-561.

Lotz, A. D. (2014). The television will be revolutionized (2nd ed.). New York: NYU Press.

Maharey, S. (2006, June 15). Free-to-air digital TV to begin roll-out next year. Media Release: Ministry of Broadcasting.

Netflix. (2003). Annual report 2002. Los Gatos, CA. OzTAM, RegionalTAM, Nielsen (2015). Australian multi-

screen report quarter 03 2015. Sydney: OzTAM, Re- gionalTAM, Nielsen.

OzTAM. (2014). Latest available reports. Retrieved from http://www.oztam.com.au/LatestAvailableReports.a spx

Media and Communication, 2016, Volume 4, Issue 3, Pages 109-122 122

Pash, C. (2014, 27 August). The Netflix challenge: The two major hurdles in The Australian market for the service transforming the TV industry. Gizmodo. Re- trieved from http://www.gizmodo.com.au/2014/08/ the-netflix-challenge-the-two-major-hurdles-in-the- australian-market-for-the-service-transforming-the- tv-industry

Pullar-Strecker, T. (2012, March 30). Quickflix asks for ‘anti-siphon’ law. Dominion Post, p. C.3.

Pullar-Strecker, T. (2015a, Oct 12). Is streaming Ameri- can Netflix a crime? Taranaki Daily News. Retrieved from http://search.proquest.com.ezproxy.lib.swin. edu.au/docview/1721242522?accountid=14205

Pullar-Strecker, T. (2015b, February 3). Sky puts chill on Netflix's Kiwi offerings. The Southland Times, p. 13.

Roy Morgan Research. (2015a, June 17). Mad Max or Tomorrowland? State of the nation spotlights the changing Australian media landscape. Roy Morgan Research. Retrieved from http://www.roymorgan. com/findings/6293-state-of-the-nation-media-spot light-june-2015-201506170437

Roy Morgan Research. (2015b, June 23). Netflix is the new black: 1 million users, more than 3 times rivals Presto, Stan, Quickflix & Foxtel Play combined. Roy Morgan Research. Retrieved from http://www. roymorgan.com/findings/6312-netflix-already-domi nates-streaming-video-on-demand-television-may- 2015-201506230322

Roy Morgan Research. (2015c, 28 October). 1 in 10 Kiwis have Netflix. Roy Morgan Research. Retrieved from http://www.roymorgan.com/findings/6524-netflix- reaches-one-in-ten-new-zealanders-june-2015-2015 10272311

Roy Morgan Research. (2015d, November 12). 2.677 mil- lion Australians have Netflix as subscriptions surpass one million homes. Roy Morgan Research. Retrieved from http://www.roymorgan.com/findings/6548-lat est-netflix-subscription-data-october-2015-20151112 0427

Sanyal, K. (2015, May). Applying GST to digital products and services imported by consumers. Parliamentary Library Budget Review 2015–16. Retrieved from http://www.aph.gov.au/About_Parliament/Parliame ntary_Departments/Parliamentary_Library/pubs/rp/ BudgetReview201516/Digital

Sarandos, T. (2015, December 7). Netflix, Inc. (NFLX) Ted Sarandos presents at the UBS 43rd Annual Global Media and Communications Conference Transcript. Retrieved from http://seekingalpha.com/article/373 9526-netflix-inc-nflx-ted-sarandos-present-ubs-43rd- annual-global-media-communications-conference

Scott, D. (2008, July). Online rental markets consolidate: New Zealand merger signals continuation of global trend. Screen Digest, 442, p. 196.

Scott, M. (2015, September 15). The future of the Aus- tralian story. Inaugural Brian Johns AO Lecture: Mac- quarie University. Retrieved from http://about.abc. net.au/speeches/the-future-of-the-australian-story

Slabbert, B. (2014, November 13). TV online options stream in. Timaru Herald, p.8.

Stanhope, K. (2015, June 9). Jaden Smith joins Baz Luhr- mann's hip-hop drama ‘The Get Down’. The Holly- wood Reporter. Retrieved from http://www.holly woodreporter.com/live-feed/jaden-smith-joins-baz- luhrmanns-801354

Starks, M. (2013). The digital television revolution: Ori- gins to outcomes. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.

Turner, G. (2011). Convergence and divergence: The in- ternational experience of digital television. In J. Ben- nett & N. Strange (Eds.), Television as digital media (pp. 31-51). Durham and London: Duke University Press.

Uricchio, W. (2009, September). Contextualizing the broadcast era: Nation, commerce, constraint. The Annals of the American Academy of Political and So- cial Science, 625, pp. 60-73.

White, D. (2015, August 8). Numbers put Netflix right in sight of Foxtel. Sydney Morning Herald, p. 13.

White, D., & McIntyre, P. (2015a, 10 August). The Sharp threat to Foxtel. Australian Financial Review, p. 1.

White, D., & McIntyre, P. (2015b, 11 August). Netflix threat to TV overhyped: Foxtel CEO. Australian Fi- nancial Review, p. 44.

Withers, T. (1997, August 27). Independent Newspapers agrees to buy 48% of pay-TV operator. Asian Wall Street Journal, p. 8.

Wolff, M. (2015). Television is the new television: The unexpected triumph of old media in the digital age. New York: Portfolio/Penguin.

About the Author

Dr. Jock Given Jock Given is professor of media and communications at Swinburne University’s Institute for Social Research, associate editor of the International Journal of Digital Television and chief investigator on an Australian Research Council-funded project “Spectrum after Scarcity—Rethinking Radiofrequency Management for a Connected Society”. He previously worked as Director of the Communications Law Centre, Policy Advisor at the Australian Film Commission and Director, Legislation and Industry Eco- nomics, in the Australian Department of Transport and Communications.

__MACOSX/remediasectoranalysis/._There will be TV I don't know what it will be called.pdf

__MACOSX/._remediasectoranalysis